Dell Configuration Guide for the S4820T System 9.11(2.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2017 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents 1 About this Guide...........................................................................................................................................34 Audience............................................................................................................................................................................34 Conventions.....................................................................................................................................................
Using HTTP for File Transfers........................................................................................................................................ 54 Verify Software Images Before Installation...................................................................................................................55 4 Management................................................................................................................................................
Lock CONFIGURATION Mode....................................................................................................................................... 78 Viewing the Configuration Lock Status...................................................................................................................78 Recovering from a Forgotten Password.......................................................................................................................
Configure a Standard IP ACL.........................................................................................................................................110 Configuring a Standard IP ACL Filter.......................................................................................................................111 Configure an Extended IP ACL......................................................................................................................................
Configure BFD for BGP........................................................................................................................................... 153 Configure BFD for VRRP.........................................................................................................................................160 Configuring Protocol Liveness................................................................................................................................ 163 Troubleshooting BFD...
Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute............................................................................................................ 200 Changing MED Attributes....................................................................................................................................... 201 Changing the LOCAL_PREFERENCE Attribute..................................................................................................
Priority-Based Flow Control................................................................................................................................... 242 Enhanced Transmission Selection..........................................................................................................................243 Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol (DCBx)...............................................................................................244 Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow..........
13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)..........................................................................................281 DHCP Packet Format and Options.............................................................................................................................. 281 Assign an IP Address using DHCP............................................................................................................................... 283 Implementation Information.......................
Fibre Channel over Ethernet........................................................................................................................................ 309 Ensure Robustness in a Converged Ethernet Network............................................................................................ 309 FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges................................................................................................................................311 FIP Snooping in a Switch Stack....
Important Points to Remember............................................................................................................................. 338 18 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)..............................................................................................339 Important Points to Remember................................................................................................................................... 339 Configure GVRP.....................................
IGMP Snooping Implementation Information....................................................................................................... 362 Configuring IGMP Snooping...................................................................................................................................362 Removing a Group-Port Association..................................................................................................................... 363 Disabling Multicast Flooding.....................
Port Channel Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................391 Port Channel Definition and Standards..................................................................................................................391 Port Channel Benefits..............................................................................................................................................
IP Addresses....................................................................................................................................................................421 Implementation Information.................................................................................................................................... 421 Configuration Tasks for IP Addresses..........................................................................................................................
Addressing................................................................................................................................................................. 441 Implementing IPv6 with Dell Networking OS............................................................................................................. 442 ICMPv6...........................................................................................................................................................................
Interface Support.....................................................................................................................................................468 Adjacencies...............................................................................................................................................................468 Graceful Restart........................................................................................................................................................
mac learning-limit mac-address-sticky................................................................................................................. 506 mac learning-limit station-move.............................................................................................................................507 mac learning-limit no-station-move.......................................................................................................................507 Learning Limit Violation Actions........
Enabling a Switch for Multicast NLB.................................................................................................................... 540 31 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP).......................................................................................... 541 Protocol Overview..........................................................................................................................................................541 Anycast RP...............................
MSTP Sample Configurations...................................................................................................................................... 572 Router 1 Running-ConfigurationRouter 2 Running-ConfigurationRouter 3 RunningConfigurationSFTOS Example Running-Configuration....................................................................................... 573 Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations........................................................................................
Configuration Task List for OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4)......................................................................................... 616 Sample Configurations for OSPFv2............................................................................................................................ 629 Basic OSPFv2 Router Topology.............................................................................................................................630 OSPF Area 0 — Te 1/1 and 1/2......................
Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains............................................................................................................. 662 38 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM).................................................................................................. 663 Implementation Information..........................................................................................................................................663 Important Points to Remember.....................
Related Configuration Tasks...................................................................................................................................696 Enabling PVST+............................................................................................................................................................. 696 Disabling PVST+.............................................................................................................................................................
RIPv2......................................................................................................................................................................... 737 Implementation Information..........................................................................................................................................738 Configuration Information............................................................................................................................................
Configuration Task List for TACACS+.................................................................................................................... 781 TACACS+ Remote Authentication.........................................................................................................................782 Command Authorization.........................................................................................................................................
Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking......................................................................................................................819 Mapping C-Tag to S-Tag dot1p Values...................................................................................................................820 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling............................................................................................................................................ 821 Implementation Information.....
Copying Configuration Files via SNMP................................................................................................................. 845 Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Running-Config.................................................................................. 845 Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via FTP....................................................................................846 Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via TFTP....................
Create a Stack..........................................................................................................................................................870 Add Units to an Existing Stack............................................................................................................................... 874 Split a Stack..............................................................................................................................................................
54 SupportAssist..........................................................................................................................................904 Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard........................................................................................905 Configuring SupportAssist Manually........................................................................................................................... 905 Configuring SupportAssist Activity............
Get Help with Upgrades............................................................................................................................................... 935 59 Virtual LANs (VLANs)..............................................................................................................................936 Default VLAN..................................................................................................................................................................
eVLT Configuration Step Examples....................................................................................................................... 984 PIM-Sparse Mode Configuration Example.................................................................................................................986 Verifying a VLT Configuration.......................................................................................................................................
VRF Configuration........................................................................................................................................................1023 Loading VRF CAM..................................................................................................................................................1023 Creating a Non-Default VRF Instance.................................................................................................................
Display Stack Port Statistics................................................................................................................................. 1076 Display Stack Member Counters.......................................................................................................................... 1076 Enabling Application Core Dumps.............................................................................................................................. 1079 Mini Core Dumps.............
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S4820T platform is available with Dell Networking OS version 8.3.19.0 and beyond. The S4820T platform is available with Dell Networking OS version 8.3.19.0 and beyond.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
You can set user access rights to commands and command modes using privilege levels. For more information about privilege levels and security options, refer to the Privilege Levels Overview section in the Security chapter. The Dell Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels: • EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level.
OPENFLOW INSTANCE PVST PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP PREFIX-LIST PRIORITY-GROUP PROTOCOL GVRP QOS POLICY RSTP ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE SUPPORTASSIST TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP uBoot Navigating CLI Modes The Dell Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command 40 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-fo-0/0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Interface Group Dell(conf-if-group)# interface(INTERFACE modes) Interface Range Dell(conf-if-range)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Loopback Interface Dell(conf-if-lo-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Management Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-ma-0/0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Null Interface Dell(conf-if-nu-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Port-channel Interface Dell(conf
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command ROUTER RIP Dell(conf-router_rip)# router rip SPANNING TREE Dell(config-span)# protocol spanning-tree 0 TRACE-LIST Dell(conf-trace-acl)# ip trace-list CLASS-MAP Dell(config-class-map)# class-map CONTROL-PLANE Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)# control-plane-cpuqos DHCP Dell(config-dhcp)# ip dhcp server DHCP POOL Dell(config-dhcp-pool-name)# pool (DHCP Mode) ECMP Dell(conf-ecmp-group-ecmpgroup-id)# ecmp-group EIS Dell(conf-mgmt-eis)# management egres
The do Command You can enter an EXEC mode command from any CONFIGURATION mode (CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, SPANNING TREE, and so on.) without having to return to EXEC mode by preceding the EXEC mode command with the do command. The following example shows the output of the do command.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/17 no ip address no shutdown Layer 2 protocols are disabled by default. To enable Layer 2 protocols, use the no disable command. For example, in PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode, enter no disable to enable Spanning Tree. Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the ? or help command: • To list the keywords available in the current mode, enter ? at the prompt or after a keyword.
Short-Cut Key Combination Action CNTL-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the command line. CNTL-L Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with CTRL-P or the UP arrow key. CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command. CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line.
NOTE: Dell Networking OS accepts a space or no space before and after the pipe. To filter a phrase with spaces, underscores, or ranges, enclose the phrase with double quotation marks. The except keyword displays text that does not match the specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Console Access The device has two management ports available for system access: a serial RS-232 /RJ-45 console port and an out-of-band (OOB) Ethernet port to manage the switch with an IP address. Serial Console The RJ-45/RS-232 console port is labeled on the upper right-hand side, as you face the I/O side of the chassis. Figure 1.
Table 2.
• To avoid denial of service (DoS) attacks, a rate-limit of 10 concurrent sessions per minute in SSH is devised. Therefore, you might experience a failure in executing SSH-related scripts when multiple short SSH commands are executed. • If you issue an interactive command in the SSH session, the behavior may not really be interactive.
interface ManagementEthernet slot/port 2 Assign an IP address to the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address/mask 3 • ip-address: an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). • mask: a subnet mask in /prefix-length format (/ xx). Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Configure a Management Route Define a path from the system to the network from which you are accessing the system remotely.
To configure an enable password, use the following command. • Create a password to access EXEC Privilege mode. CONFIGURATION mode enable [password | secret | sha256-password] [level level] [encryption-type] password • level: is the privilege level, is 15 by default, and is not required. • encryption-type: specifies how you input the password, is 0 by default, and is not required. • 0 is to input the password in clear text.
Example of Copying a File to an FTP Server Dell#copy flash://Dell-EF-8.2.1.0.bin ftp://myusername:mypassword@10.10.10.10/ /Dell/Dell-EF-8.2.1.0 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 27952672 bytes successfully copied Example of Importing a File to the Local System core1#$//copy ftp://myusername:mypassword@10.10.10.10//Dell/ Dell-EF-8.2.1.0.bin flash:// Destination file name [Dell-EF-8.2.1.0.bin.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!.! 44250499 bytes successfully copied Dell# Dell#copy ftp://10.16.127.35 nfsmount: Source file name []: test.c User name to login remote host: username Example of Logging in to Copy from NFS Mount Dell#copy nfsmount:///test flash: Destination file name [test]: test2 ! 5592 bytes successfully copied Dell# Dell#copy nfsmount:///test.txt ftp://10.16.127.35 Destination file name [test.
• Save the running-configuration to an SCP server. EXEC Privilege mode copy running-config scp://{hostip | hostname}/ filepath/filename NOTE: When copying to a server, a host name can only be used if a DNS server is configured. NOTE: When you load the startup configuration or a configuration file from a network server such as TFTP to the running configuration, the configuration is added to the running configuration. This does not replace the existing running configuration.
View Configuration Files Configuration files have three commented lines at the beginning of the file, as shown in the following example, to help you track the last time any user made a change to the file, which user made the changes, and when the file was last saved to the startup-configuration.
feature configuration file generated for each image contains feature names, and denotes if this enabling or disabling method is available. You can enable or disable the VRF application globally across the system by using this capability. Activate the VRF application on a device by using the feature vrf command in CONFIGURATION mode. NOTE: The no feature vrf command is not supported on any of the platforms.
• To copy a file on the USB device, enter usbflash:// followed by the filename. In the Dell Networking OS release 9.8(0.0), HTTP services support the VRF-aware functionality. If you want the HTTP server to use a VRF table that is attached to an interface, configure that HTTP server to use a specific routing table. You can use the ip http vrf command to inform the HTTP server to use a specific routing table. After you configure this setting, the VRF table is used to look up the destination address.
To validate the software image on the flash drive after the image is transferred to the system, but before you install the image, use the verify {md5 | sha256} [ flash://]img-file [hash-value] command in EXEC mode. • md5: MD5 message-digest algorithm • sha256: SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm • flash: (Optional) Specifies the flash drive. The default uses the flash drive. You can enter the image file name. • hash-value: (Optional). Specify the relevant hash published on iSupport.
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell Networking system.
Creating a Custom Privilege Level Custom privilege levels start with the default EXEC mode command set. You can then customize privilege levels 2-14 by: • restricting access to an EXEC mode command • moving commands from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode • restricting access A user can access all commands at his privilege level and below.
• removes the resequence command from EXEC mode by requiring a minimum of privilege level 4 • • moves the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size command from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode by requiring a minimum privilege level 3, which is the configured level for VTY 0 allows access to CONFIGURATION mode with the banner command • allows access to INTERFACE tengigabitethernet and LINE modes are allowed with no commands • Remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode.
exit Exit from configuration mode interface Select an interface to configure line Configure a terminal line linecard Set line card type Dell(conf)#interface ? fastethernet Fast Ethernet interface gigabitethernet Gigabit Ethernet interface loopback Loopback interface managementethernet Management Ethernet interface null Null interface port-channel Port-channel interface range Configure interface range sonet SONET interface tengigabitethernet TenGigabit Ethernet interface vlan VLAN interface Dell(conf)#interf
• the internal buffer • console and terminal lines • any configured syslog servers To disable logging, use the following commands. • Disable all logging except on the console. CONFIGURATION mode no logging on • Disable logging to the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode no logging buffer • Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode no logging monitor • Disable console logging.
The security log contains security events and information. RBAC restricts access to audit and security logs based on the CLI sessions’ user roles. The types of information in this log consist of the following: • Establishment of secure traffic flows, such as SSH. • Violations on secure flows or certificate issues. • Adding and deleting of users.
Configuring Logging Format To display syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format, use the logging version {0 | 1} command in CONFIGURATION mode. By default, the system log version is set to 0.
Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server You can use reverse tunneling with the port forwarding to securely connect to a syslog server. Figure 2.
If you do not, the system displays an error when you attempt to enable role-based only AAA authorization. Dell(conf)# logging localhost tcp port Dell(conf)#logging 127.0.0.1 tcp 5140 Log Messages in the Internal Buffer All error messages, except those beginning with %BOOTUP (Message), are log in the internal buffer.
Configuring a UNIX System as a Syslog Server To configure a UNIX System as a syslog server, use the following command. • Configure a UNIX system as a syslog server by adding the following lines to /etc/syslog.conf on the UNIX system and assigning write permissions to the file. • Add line on a 4.1 BSD UNIX system. local7.debugging /var/log/ftos.log • Add line on a 5.7 SunOS UNIX system. local7.debugging /var/adm/ftos.
The following example enables login activity tracking and configures the system to store the login activity details for 12 days. Dell(config)#login statistics enable Dell(config)#login statistics time-period 12 Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command. Example of the show login statistics Command The show login statistics command displays the successful and failed login details of the current user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period.
Example of the show login statistics user user-id command The show login statistics user user-id command displays the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. Dell# show login statistics user admin -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions Example of Configuring Concurrent Session Limit The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4. Dell(config)#login concurrent-session limit 4 Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions To enable the system to clear existing login sessions, follow this procedure: • Use the following command.
Enabling Secured CLI Mode The secured CLI mode prevents the users from enhancing the permissions or promoting the privilege levels. • Enter the following command to enable the secured CLI mode: CONFIGURATION Mode secure-cli enable After entering the command, save the running-configuration. Once you save the running-configuration, the secured CLI mode is enabled. If you do not want to enter the secured mode, do not save the running-configuration.
To view the logging buffer and configuration, use the show logging command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration. To view the logging configuration, use the show running-config logging command in privilege mode, as shown in the example for Configure a UNIX Logging Facility Level.
• auth (for authorization messages) • cron (for system scheduler messages) • daemon (for system daemons) • kern (for kernel messages) • local0 (for local use) • local1 (for local use) • local2 (for local use) • local3 (for local use) • local4 (for local use) • local5 (for local use) • local6 (for local use) • local7 (for local use) • lpr (for line printer system messages) • mail (for mail system messages) • news (for USENET news messages) • sys9 (system use) • sys10 (system
• number: the range is from zero (0) to 8. • end-number: the range is from 1 to 8. You can configure multiple virtual terminals at one time by entering a number and an end-number. 2 Configure a level and set the maximum number of messages to print. LINE mode logging synchronous [level severity-level | all] [limit] Configure the following optional parameters: • level severity-level: the range is from 0 to 7. The default is 2. Use the all keyword to include all messages.
Configuration Task List for File Transfer Services The configuration tasks for file transfer services are: • Enable FTP Server (mandatory) • Configure FTP Server Parameters (optional) • Configure FTP Client Parameters (optional) Enabling the FTP Server To enable the system as an FTP server, use the following command. To view FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode. • Enable FTP on the system.
Configuring FTP Client Parameters To configure FTP client parameters, use the following commands. • Enter the following keywords and the interface information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
access-class access-list-name [ipv4 | ipv6] NOTE: If you already have configured generic IP ACL on a terminal line, then you cannot further apply IPv4 or IPv6 specific filtering on top of this configuration. Similarly, if you have configured either IPv4 or IPv6 specific filtering on a terminal line, you cannot apply generic IP ACL on top of this configuration.
tacacs+ 1 Prompt for a username and password and use a TACACS+ server to authenticate. Configure an authentication method list. You may use a mnemonic name or use the keyword default. The default authentication method for terminal lines is local and the default method list is empty. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default} [method-1] [method-2] [method-3] [method-4] [method-5] [method-6] 2 Apply the method list from Step 1 to a terminal line.
exec-timeout 0 0 Dell(config-line-console)# Using Telnet to get to Another Network Device To telnet to another device, use the following commands. NOTE: The device allows 120 Telnet sessions per minute, allowing the login and logout of 10 Telnet sessions, 12 times in a minute. If the system reaches this non-practical limit, the Telnet service is stopped for 10 minutes. You can use console and SSH service to access the system during downtime. • Telnet to a device with an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
You can then send any user a message using the send command from EXEC Privilege mode. Alternatively, you can clear any line using the clear command from EXEC Privilege mode. If you clear a console session, the user is returned to EXEC mode. Example of Locking CONFIGURATION Mode for Single-User Access Dell(conf)#configuration mode exclusive auto BATMAN(conf)#exit 3d23h35m: %RPM0-P:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console Dell#config ! Locks configuration mode exclusively.
8 Remove all authentication statements you might have for the console. LINE mode no authentication login no password 9 Save the running-config. EXEC Privilege mode copy running-config startup-config 10 Set the system parameters to use the startup configuration file when the system reloads. uBoot mode setenv stconfigignore false 11 Save the running-config.
Recovering from a Failed Start A system that does not start correctly might be attempting to boot from a corrupted Dell Networking OS image or from a mis-specified location. In this case, you can restart the system and interrupt the boot process to point the system to another boot location. Use the setenv command, as described in the following steps.
* Warning - Restoring factory defaults will delete the existing * * persistent settings (stacking, fanout, etc.) * * After restoration the unit(s) will be powercycled immediately. * * Proceed with caution ! * *********************************************************************** Proceed with factory settings? Confirm [yes/no]:yes -- Restore status -Unit Nvram Config -----------------------0 Success Power-cycling the unit(s). ....
For example, 255.255.0.0. 5 Assign an IP address as the default gateway for the system. uBoot mode => setenv gatewayip gateway_ip_address For example, 10.16.150.254. 6 Save the modified environmental variables. uBoot mode => saveenv 7 Reload the system.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
Figure 4. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
• Configuring dot1x Profile • Configuring the Static MAB and MAB Profile • Configuring Critical VLAN Port-Authentication Process The authentication process begins when the authenticator senses that a link status has changed from down to up: 1 When the authenticator senses a link state change, it requests that the supplicant identify itself using an EAP Identity Request frame. 2 The supplicant responds with its identity in an EAP Response Identity frame.
Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.1X-triggered Access-Request messages: Attribute 31 Calling-station-id: relays the supplicant MAC address to the authentication server. Attribute 41 NAS-Port-Type: NAS-port physical port type. 15 indicates Ethernet. Attribute 61 NAS-Port: the physical port number by which the authenticator is connected to the supplicant.
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1 Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2 Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3 Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Examples of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally and on an Interface Verify that 802.
In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled. Dell#show running-config | find dot1x dot1x authentication ! [output omitted] ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! Dell# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. Dell#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/ 802.
mac 00:50:56:aa:01:11 Dell(conf-dot1x-profile)# Dell(conf-dot1x-profile)#exit Dell(conf)# Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions When the authenticator sends a Request Identity frame and the supplicant does not respond, the authenticator waits for 30 seconds and then re-transmits the frame. The amount of time that the authenticator waits before re-transmitting and the maximum number of times that the authenticator retransmits can be configured.
• • after 90 seconds and a maximum of 10 times for an unresponsive supplicant re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame The bold lines show the new re-transmit interval, new quiet period, and new maximum re-transmissions. Dell(conf-if-range-Te-2/1)#dot1x tx-period 90 Dell(conf-if-range-Te-2/1)#dot1x max-eap-req 10 Dell(conf-if-range-Te-2/1)#dot1x quiet-period 120 Dell#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 802.
Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Auth PAE State: Backend State: 90 seconds 120 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 10 SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Initialize Initialize Re-Authenticating a Port You can configure the authenticator for periodic re-authentication.
Auth PAE State: Backend State: Initialize Initialize Configuring Timeouts If the supplicant or the authentication server is unresponsive, the authenticator terminates the authentication process after 30 seconds by default. You can configure the amount of time the authenticator waits for a response. To terminate the authentication process, use the following commands: • Terminate the authentication process due to an unresponsive supplicant.
Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication Dell Networking OS supports dynamic VLAN assignment when using 802.1X. The basis for VLAN assignment is RADIUS attribute 81, Tunnel-Private-Group-ID.
5 Verify that the port has been authorized and placed in the desired VLAN (refer to the illustration in Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs Typically, the authenticator (the Dell system) denies the supplicant access to the network until the supplicant is authenticated.
Configure a port to be placed in the VLAN after failing the authentication process as specified number of times using the dot1x authfail-vlan command from INTERFACE mode. Configure the maximum number of authentication attempts by the authenticator using the keyword max-attempts with this command.
dot1x profile {profile-name} profile—name — Enter the dot1x profile name. The profile name length is limited to 32 characters. Example of Configuring and Displaying a dot1x Profile Dell(conf)#dot1x profile test Dell(conf-dot1x-profile)# Dell#show dot1x profile 802.1x profile information ----------------------------Dot1x Profile test Profile MACs 00:00:00:00:01:11 Configuring the Static MAB and MAB Profile Enable MAB (mac-auth-bypass) before using the dot1x static-mab command to enable static mab.
Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Configuring Critical VLAN By default, critical-VLAN is not configured. If authentication fails because of a server which is not reachable, user session is authenticated under critical-VLAN. To configure a critical-VLAN for users or devices when authenticating server is not reachable, use the following command.
6 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. Optimizing CAM Utilization During the Attachment of ACLs to VLANs To minimize the number of entries in CAM, enable and configure the ACL CAM feature. Use this feature when you apply ACLs to a VLAN (or a set of VLANs) and when you apply ACLs to a set of ports.
• The ACL VLAN group is deleted and it does not contain VLAN members. • The ACL is applied or removed from a group and the ACL group does not contain a VLAN member. • The description of the ACL group is added or removed. Guidelines for Configuring ACL VLAN Groups Keep the following points in mind when you configure ACL VLAN groups: • The interfaces where you apply the ACL VLAN group function as restricted interfaces.
description description 3 Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit 4 Add VLAN member(s) to an ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode member vlan {VLAN-range} 5 Display all the ACL VLAN groups or display a specific ACL VLAN group, identified by name.
EXEC Privilege mode Dell#show cam-usage switch Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|============|============|============= 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 | 9 | 197 Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%. Viewing CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv4Flow and Layer 2 ACL sub- partitions) using the show cam-usage command in EXEC Privilege mode.
2 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | | IN-L3 ACL | | IN-V6 ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL 3 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | | IN-L3 ACL | | IN-V6 ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
To reset the number of FP blocks to the default, use the no version of these commands. By default, zero groups are allocated for the ACL in VCAP. ACL VLAN groups or CAM optimization is not enabled by default. You must also allocate the slices for CAM optimization. To display the number of FP blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services, use the show cam-acl-vlan command. After you configure the ACL VLAN groups, reboot the system to store the settings in nonvolatile storage.
7 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
Topics: • IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) • IP Fragment Handling • Configure a Standard IP ACL • Configure an Extended IP ACL • Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs • Assign an IP ACL to an Interface • Applying an IP ACL • Configure Ingress ACLs • Configure Egress ACLs • IP Prefix Lists • ACL Resequencing • Route Maps • Important Points to Remember • Logging of ACL Processes • Flow-Based Monitoring Support for ACLs IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell Networking switch/routers,
CAM Usage The following section describes CAM allocation and CAM optimization. • User Configurable CAM Allocation • CAM Optimization User Configurable CAM Allocation Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in filter processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. (There are 16 FP blocks, but System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated.
If counters are enabled on ACL rules that are already configured, those counters are reset when a new rule which is inserted or prepended or appended requires a hardware shift in the flow table. Resetting the counters to 0 is transient as the proginal counter values are retained after a few seconds. If there is no need to shift the flow in the hardware, the counters are not affected.
Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 4 class-map cmap2 Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#exit Dell(conf)#interface te 10/1 Dell(conf-if-te-10/1)#service-policy input pmap IP Fragment Handling Dell Networking OS supports a configurable option to explicitly deny IP fragmented packets, particularly second and subsequent packets. It extends the existing ACL command syntax with the fragments keyword for all Layer 3 rules applicable to all Layer protocols (permit/ deny ip/tcp/udp/icmp).
• If a packet's FO > 0, the packet is denied. • If a packet's FO = 0, the next ACL line is processed. Example of Permitting All Packets from a Specified Host In this first example, TCP packets from host 10.1.1.1 with TCP destination port equal to 24 are permitted. All others are denied. Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended ABC Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit tcp host 10.1.1.
To view the rules of a particular ACL configured on a particular interface, use the show ip accounting access-list ACL-name interface interface command in EXEC Privilege mode. Example of Viewing the Rules of a Specific ACL on an Interface The following is an example of viewing the rules of a specific ACL on an interface. Dell#show ip accounting access-list ToOspf interface gig 1/6 Standard IP access list ToOspf seq 5 deny any seq 10 deny 10.2.0.0 /16 seq 15 deny 10.3.0.0 /16 seq 20 deny 10.4.0.
! ip access-list standard acl1 seq 5 permit 10.1.0.0/16 monitor 177 Dell(config-std-nacl)# To view all configured IP ACLs, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following examples shows how to view a standard ACL filter sequence for an interface.
ip access-list extended access-list-name 2 Configure an extended IP ACL filter for TCP packets. CONFIG-EXT-NACL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] Configure Filters, UDP Packets To create a filter for UDP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1 Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name.
{deny | permit} tcp {source mask] | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] • Configure a deny or permit filter to examine UDP packets. CONFIG-EXT-NACL mode {deny | permit} udp {source mask | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match.
For information about MAC ACLs, refer to Layer 2. Assign an IP ACL to an Interface To pass traffic through a configured IP ACL, assign that ACL to a physical interface, a port channel interface, or a VLAN. The IP ACL is applied to all traffic entering a physical or port channel interface and the traffic is either forwarded or dropped depending on the criteria and actions specified in the ACL. The same ACL may be applied to different interfaces and that changes its functionality.
To filter traffic on Telnet sessions, use only standard ACLs in the access-class command. Counting ACL Hits You can view the number of packets matching the ACL by using the count option when creating ACL entries. 1 Create an ACL that uses rules with the count option. Refer to Configure a Standard IP ACL Filter. 2 Apply the ACL as an inbound or outbound ACL on an interface. 3 show ip accounting access-list EXEC Privilege mode View the number of packets matching the ACL.
To create an egress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows viewing the configuration, applying rules to the newly created access group, and viewing the access list. NOTE: VRF based ACL configurations are not supported on the egress traffic. Example of Applying ACL Rules to Egress Traffic and Viewing ACL Configuration To specify ingress, use the out keyword. Begin applying rules to the ACL with the ip access-list extended abcd command.
CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 control-plane [egress filter] 3 Create a Layer 3 ACL using permit rules with the count option to describe the desired CPU traffic. CONFIG-NACL mode permit ip {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} count [monitor [session-id]] Dell Networking OS Behavior: Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) hellos and internet group management protocol (IGMP) packets are not affected when you enable egress ACL filtering for CPU traffic.
• Configuring a prefix list • Use a prefix list for route redistribution For a complete listing of all commands related to prefix lists, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. Creating a Prefix List To create a prefix list, use the following commands. 1 Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. You are in PREFIX LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action.
ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create a prefix list filter with a deny or permit action. CONFIG-NPREFIXL mode {deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • • ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32). le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32).
Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: filter_ospf ip prefix-list filter_in: count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10 ip prefix-list filter_ospf: count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10 Dell> Applying a Prefix List for Route Redistribution To pass traffic through a configured prefix list, use the prefix list in a route redistribution command. Apply the prefix list to all traffic redistributed into the routing process.
If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF mode distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | rip | static] Example of Viewing Configured Prefix Lists (ROUTER OSPF mode) To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER OSPF mode, or the show running-config ospf command in EXEC mode. Dell(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 34 network 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.255 area 0.0.0.
resequence access-list {ipv4 | ipv6 | mac} {access-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} • IPv4 or IPv6 prefix-list EXEC mode resequence prefix-list {ipv4 | ipv6} {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} Examples of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have the Same Number or Different Numbers Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command.
Route Maps Although route maps are similar to ACLs and prefix lists in that they consist of a series of commands that contain a matching criterion and an action, route maps can modify parameters in matching packets. Implementation Information ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution. For example, a route map can be called to filter only specific routes and to add a metric. Route maps also have an “implicit deny.
route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] The default is permit. The optional seq keyword allows you to assign a sequence number to the route map instance. Configured Route Map Examples The default action is permit and the default sequence number starts at 10. When you use the keyword deny in configuring a route map, routes that meet the match filters are not redistributed. To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTE-MAP mode.
Configure Route Map Filters Within ROUTE-MAP mode, there are match and set commands. • match commands search for a certain criterion in the routes. • set commands change the characteristics of routes, either adding something or specifying a level. When there are multiple match commands with the same parameter under one instance of route-map, Dell Networking OS does a match between all of those match commands.
• Match routes whose next hop is a specific interface. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match interface interface The parameters are: • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of match commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of match filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configuring Set Conditions To configure a set condition, use the following commands. • Add an AS-PATH number to the beginning of the AS-PATH. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set as-path prepend as-number [...
To create route map instances, use these commands. There is no limit to the number of set commands per route map, but the convention is to keep the number of set filters in a route map low. Set commands do not require a corresponding match command. Configure a Route Map for Route Redistribution Route maps on their own cannot affect traffic and must be included in different commands to affect routing traffic.
Continue Clause Normally, when a match is found, set clauses are executed, and the packet is then forwarded; no more route-map modules are processed. If you configure the continue command at the end of a module, the next module (or a specified module) is processed even after a match is found. The following example shows a continue clause at the end of a route-map module. In this example, if a match is found in the route-map “test” module 10, module 30 is processed.
• For IP packets that contain the transport layer protocol as Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) or User Datagram Protocol (UDP), the ACL name, sequence number, ACL action (permit or deny), source and destination MAC addresses, source and destination IP addresses, and the source and destination ports (Layer 4 parameters) are also recorded. If the packet contains an unidentified EtherType or transport layer protocol, the values for these parameters are saved as Unknown in the log message.
CONFIG-STD-NACL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [log [thresholdin-msgs count] ] 2 Specify the interval in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. You can enter an interval in the range of 1-10 minutes. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is 5 minutes. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold has exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses.
The ACL agent module saves monitoring details in its local database and also in the CAM region to monitor packets that match the specified criterion. The ACL agent maintains data on the source port, the destination port, and the endpoint to which the packet must be forwarded when a match occurs with the ACL entry. If you configure the flow-based enable command and do not apply an ACL on the source port or the monitored port, both flow-based monitoring and port mirroring do not function.
flow-based enable 2 Define access-list rules that include the keyword monitor. Dell Networking OS only considers port monitoring traffic that matches rules with the keyword monitor. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list For more information, see Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Apply the ACL to the monitored port.
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Detection Multiplier The number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. Length The entire length of the BFD packet. My Discriminator A random number generated by the local system to identify the session. Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface.
Demand mode If one system requests Demand mode, the other system stops sending periodic control packets; it only sends a response to status inquiries from the Demand mode initiator. Either system (but not both) can request Demand mode at any time. NOTE: Dell Networking OS supports Asynchronous mode only. A session can have four states: Administratively Down, Down, Init, and Up. State Description Administratively Down The local system does not participate in a particular session.
Figure 10.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
• Configure BFD for OSPFv3 • Configure BFD for IS-IS • Configure BFD for BGP • Configure BFD for VRRP • Configuring Protocol Liveness • Troubleshooting BFD Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol.
Example of Viewing Session Parameters R1(conf-if-te-4/24)#bfd interval 100 min_rx 100 multiplier 4 role passive R1(conf-if-te-4/24)#do show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 2.2.2.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:09:c3:e5 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
Configuring BFD for static routes is a three-step process: 1 Enable BFD globally. 2 Configure static routes on both routers on the system (either local or remote). 3 Configure an IP route to connect BFD on the static routes using the ip route bfd command. Related Configuration Tasks • Changing Static Route Session Parameters • Disabling BFD for Static Routes Establishing Sessions for Static Routes Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. Figure 12.
To view detailed session information, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information. Establishing Static Route Sessions on Specific Neighbors You can selectively enable BFD sessions on specific neighbors based on a destination prefix-list. When you establish a BFD session using the ip route bfd command, all the next-hop neighbors in the static route become part of the BFD session. Starting with Dell Networking OS release 9.11.0.
• Change parameters for all static route sessions. CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd [prefix-list prefix-list-name] interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down.
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors for the Default VRF BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Enable BFD globally.
INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Example of Verifying Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 * 2.2.3.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O 2.2.3.
B C I O O3 R M V VT * * * * * * - BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr 1.0.1.1 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 RemoteAddr 1.0.1.2 192.168.122.135 192.168.122.136 192.168.122.137 192.168.122.138 192.168.122.139 Interface Te 1/49/1 Te 1/38 Te 1/42 Te 1/43 Te 1/38 Te 1/42 State Up Up Up Up Up Up Rx-int 200 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Dell# show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 10.1.3.
Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 6 Dell# Changing OSPF Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: desired tx interval, required min rx interval, detection multiplier, and system role. Configure these parameters for all OSPF sessions or all OSPF sessions on a particular interface.
Related Configuration Tasks • • Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 Establishing Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors You can establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors at once or with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPFv3 adjacency is in the Full state. To establish BFD with all OSPFv3 neighbors or with OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors.
• Disable BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors. ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode no bfd all-neighbors • Disable BFD sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for IS-IS When using BFD with IS-IS, the IS-IS protocol registers with the BFD manager on the RPM. BFD sessions are then established with all neighboring interfaces participating in IS-IS.
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode • bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
Prerequisites Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure the following settings: 1 Configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect, as described in Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4). 2 Enable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors to reduce convergence time (the neighbor fall-over command), as described in BGP Fast Fall-Over. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect.
BFD notifies BGP of any failure conditions that it detects on the link. Recovery actions are initiated by BGP. BFD for BGP is supported only on directly-connected BGP neighbors and only in BGP IPv4 networks. Up to 128 simultaneous BFD sessions are supported As long as each BFD for BGP neighbor receives a BFD control packet within the configured BFD interval for failure detection, the BFD session remains up and BGP maintains its adjacencies.
The BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd allneighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. • Disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor. ROUTER BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable • Remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor.
EXEC Privilege mode show ip bgp neighbors [ip-address] Examples of Verifying BGP Information The following example shows verifying a BGP configuration. R2# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 2 neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 1.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.2 no shutdown bfd all-neighbors The following example shows viewing all BFD neighbors.
Session Discriminator: 10 Neighbor Discriminator: 11 Local Addr: 2.2.2.3 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:66:da:34 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 BFD is enabled, Interval 100 Min_rx 100 Multiplier 3 Role Active 3 neighbor(s) using 24168 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 0 0 0 1 1 1 282 273 282 281 273 281 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 00:38:12 04:32:26 00:38:12 The following example shows viewing BFD information for a specified neighbor.
R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.4 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.4, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP peer-group mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM).
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. • Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
The bold line shows that VRRP BFD sessions are enabled. Dell(conf-if-te-4/25)#vrrp bfd all-neighbors Dell(conf-if-te-4/25)#do show bfd neighbor * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) V - VRRP LocalAddr * 2.2.5.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.5.2 Te 4/25 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session.
To disable all VRRP sessions on an interface, sessions for a particular VRRP group, or for a particular VRRP session on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable all VRRP sessions on an interface. INTERFACE mode • no vrrp bfd all-neighbors Disable all VRRP sessions in a VRRP group. VRRP mode • bfd disable Disable a particular VRRP session on an interface.
00:54:38: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Up for neighbor 2.2.2.2 on interface Te 4/24 (diag: 0) The following example shows hexadecimal output from the debug bfd packet command. RX packet dump: 20 c0 03 18 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 04 00 01 86 a0 00 01 86 a0 00 00 00 00 00:34:13 : Sent packet for session with neighbor 2.2.2.2 on Te 4/24 TX packet dump: 20 c0 03 18 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 05 00 01 86 a0 00 01 86 a0 00 00 00 00 00:34:14 : Received packet for session with neighbor 2.
9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). The primary function of the BGP is to exchange network reachability information with other BGP systems.
IBGP provides routers inside the AS with the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS. EBGP routers exchange information with other EBGP routers as well as IBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility. Figure 17. Internal BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network.
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor. Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies.
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
Figure 19. BGP Router Rules 1 Router B receives an advertisement from Router A through eBGP. Because the route is learned through eBGP, Router B advertises it to all its iBGP peers: Routers C and D. 2 Router C receives the advertisement but does not advertise it to any peer because its only other peer is Router D, an iBGP peer, and Router D has already learned it through iBGP from Router B.
In non-deterministic mode (the bgp non-deterministic-med command is applied), paths are compared in the order in which they arrive. This method can lead to Dell Networking OS choosing different best paths from a set of paths, depending on the order in which they were received from the neighbors because MED may or may not get compared between the adjacent paths.
7 Prefer external (EBGP) to internal (IBGP) paths or confederation EBGP paths. 8 Prefer the path with the lowest IGP metric to the BGP if next-hop is selected when synchronization is disabled and only an internal path remains. 9 Dell Networking OS deems the paths as equal and does not perform steps 9 through 11, if the following criteria is met: 10 a the IBGP multipath or EBGP multipath are configured (the maximum-path command).
Figure 21. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path.
Figure 22. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a eBGP neighbor. NOTE: Any update that contains the AS path number 0 is valid. The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
MBGP uses either an IPv4 address configured on the interface (which is used to establish the IPv6 session) or a stable IPv4 address that is available in the box as the next-hop address. As a result, while advertising an IPv6 network, exchange of IPv4 routes does not lead to martian next-hop message logs. NOTE: It is possible to configure BGP peers that exchange both unicast and multicast network layer reachability information (NLRI), but you cannot connect multiprotocol BGP with BGP.
Ignore Router-ID in Best-Path Calculation You can avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath routerid ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs). The 4-Byte support is advertised as a new BGP capability (4-BYTE-AS) in the OPEN message.
ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations. AS numbers less than 65536 appear in integer format (asplain); AS numbers equal to or greater than 65536 appear in the decimal format (asdot+). For example, the AS number 65526 appears as 65526 and the AS number 65546 appears as 1.10. Dynamic AS Number Notation Application Dell Networking OS applies the ASN notation type change dynamically to the running-config statements.
Dell(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS Number Migration With this feature you can transparently change the AS number of an entire BGP network and ensure that the routes are propagated throughout the network while the migration is in progress.
3 Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B. BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances support for BGP management information base (MIB) with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05. To see these enhancements, download the MIB from the Dell website.
• Multiple BPG process instances are not supported. Thus, the f10BgpM2PeerInstance field in various tables is not used to locate a peer. • Multiple instances of the same NLRI in the BGP RIB are not supported and are set to zero in the SNMP query response. • The f10BgpM2NlriIndex and f10BgpM2AdjRibsOutIndex fields are not used. • Carrying MPLS labels in BGP is not supported. The f10BgpM2NlriOpaqueType and f10BgpM2NlriOpaquePointer fields are set to zero. • 4-byte ASN is supported.
Item Default reuse = 750 suppress = 2000 max-suppress-time = 60 minutes external distance = 20 Distance internal distance = 200 local distance = 200 keepalive = 60 seconds Timers holdtime = 180 seconds Add-path Disabled Enabling BGP By default, BGP is not enabled on the system. Dell Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN). To establish BGP sessions and route traffic, configure at least one BGP neighbor or peer.
NOTE: Use it only if you support 4-Byte AS numbers or if you support AS4 number representation. If you are supporting 4-Byte ASNs, enable this command. Disable 4-Byte support and return to the default 2-Byte format by using the no bgp four-octet-as-support command. You cannot disable 4-Byte support if you currently have a 4-Byte ASN configured. b Disabling 4-Byte AS numbers also disables ASDOT and ASDOT+ number representation. All AS numbers are displayed in ASPLAIN format.
The following example shows the show ip bgp summary command output (4–byte AS number displays). R2#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 192.168.10.2, local AS number 48735.
BGP state IDLE, in this state for 17:12:40 Last read 17:12:40, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Sent 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Received 0 updates, Sent 0 updates Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 0, neighbor version 0 0 accepted prefixes consume 0 bytes Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 0; dropped 0 Last reset never No activ
To configure AS4 number representations, use the following commands. • Enable ASPLAIN AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain • NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot • Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation.
Configuring Peer Groups To configure multiple BGP neighbors at one time, create and populate a BGP peer group. An advantage of peer groups is that members of a peer group inherit the configuration properties of the group and share same update policy. A maximum of 256 peer groups are allowed on the system. Create a peer group by assigning it a name, then adding members to the peer group. After you create a peer group, you can configure route policies for it.
When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is zanzibar, peer-group internal, Number of peers in this group 26 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 10.68.160.1 10.68.161.1 10.68.162.1 10.68.163.1 10.68.164.1 10.68.165.1 10.68.166.1 10.68.167.1 10.68.168.1 10.68.169.1 10.68.170.1 10.68.171.1 10.68.172.1 10.68.173.1 10.68.174.1 10.68.175.1 10.68.176.1 10.68.177.1 10.68.178.1 10.68.179.1 10.68.180.1 10.68.181.1 10.68.182.1 10.68.183.
BGP neighbor is 100.100.100.100, remote AS 65517, internal link Member of peer-group test for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 30.30.30.
neighbor 100.100.100.100 no shutdown Dell# Configuring Passive Peering When you enable a peer-group, the software sends an OPEN message to initiate a TCP connection. If you enable passive peering for the peer group, the software does not send an OPEN message, but it responds to an OPEN message. When a BGP neighbor connection with authentication configured is rejected by a passive peer-group, Dell Networking OS does not allow another passive peer-group on the same subnet to connect with the BGP neighbor.
• No Prepend: specifies that local AS values are not prepended to announcements from the neighbor. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. This feature is not supported on passive peer groups. Example of the Verifying that Local AS Numbering is Disabled The first line in bold shows the actual AS number. The second two lines in bold show the local AS number (6500) maintained during migration.
router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.
• The default is 120 seconds. Set maximum time to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 360 seconds. Local router supports graceful restart as a receiver only. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [role receiver-only] Enabling Neighbor Graceful Restart BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established. Otherwise, it is disabled.
To configure an AS-PATH ACL to filter a specific AS_PATH value, use these commands in the following sequence. 1 Assign a name to a AS-PATH ACL and enter AS-PATH ACL mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2 Enter the parameter to match BGP AS-PATH for filtering. CONFIG-AS-PATH mode {deny | permit} filter parameter This is the filter that is used to match the AS-path. The entries can be any format, letters, numbers, or regular expressions.
Regular Expressions as Filters Regular expressions are used to filter AS paths or community lists. A regular expression is a special character used to define a pattern that is then compared with an input string. For an AS-path access list, as shown in the previous commands, if the AS path matches the regular expression in the access list, the route matches the access list. The following lists the regular expressions accepted in Dell Networking OS.
Dell(config-as-path)#deny 32$ Dell(config-as-path)#ex Dell(conf)#router bgp 99 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor AAA filter-list Eagle in Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA filter-list Eaglein neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 filter-list 1 in neighbor 10.155.15.
Enabling Additional Paths The add-path feature is disabled by default. NOTE: Dell Networking OS recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. To allow multiple paths sent to peers, use the following commands. 1 Allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths replacing any previous ones. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp add-path [both|received|send] path-count count The range is from 2 to 64.
• • • • • local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT. quote-regexp: then any number of regular expressions. The software applies all regular expressions in the list. regexp: then a regular expression.
deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny Dell# 701:20 702:20 703:20 704:20 705:20 14551:20 701:112 702:112 703:112 704:112 705:112 14551:112 701:667 702:667 703:667 704:666 705:666 14551:666 Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group.
Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute In addition to permitting or denying routes based on the values of the COMMUNITY attributes, you can manipulate the COMMUNITY attribute value and send the COMMUNITY attribute with the route information. By default, Dell Networking OS does not send the COMMUNITY attribute. To send the COMMUNITY attribute to BGP neighbors, use the following command. • Enable the software to send the router’s COMMUNITY attribute to the BGP neighbor or peer group specified.
Example of the show ip bgp community Command To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view BGP routes matching a certain community number or a pre-defined BGP community, use the show ip bgp community command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 10.114.8.
• Change the LOCAL_PREF value. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp default local-preference value • value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show runningconfig bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. A more flexible method for manipulating the LOCAL_PREF attribute value is to use a route map. 1 Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map.
• If you do not use the all keyword, the next hop of only eBGP-learned routes is updated by the route reflector. If you use the all keyword, the next hop of both eBGP- and iBGP-learned routes are updated by the route reflector. Sets the next hop address. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set next-hop ip-address If the set next-hop command is applied on the out-bound interface using a route map, it takes precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command.
NOTE: Dell Networking OS supports up to 255 characters in a set community statement inside a route map. NOTE: You can create inbound and outbound policies. Each of the commands used for filtering has in and out parameters that you must apply. In Dell Networking OS, the order of preference varies depending on whether the attributes are applied for inbound updates or outbound updates.
• If none of the routes match any of the filters in the prefix list, the route is denied. This action is called an implicit deny. (If you want to forward all routes that do not match the prefix list criteria, you must configure a prefix list filter to permit all routes. For example, you could have the following filter as the last filter in your prefix list permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32). • After a route matches a filter, the filter’s action is applied. No additional filters are applied to the route.
ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2 Create a AS-PATH ACL filter with a deny or permit action. AS-PATH ACL mode {deny | permit} as-regular-expression 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5 Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured route map.
To view a route reflector configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp in EXEC Privilege mode. Aggregating Routes Dell Networking OS provides multiple ways to aggregate routes in the BGP routing table. At least one specific route of the aggregate must be in the routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. To aggregate routes, use the following command.
To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. Enabling Route Flap Dampening When EBGP routes become unavailable, they “flap” and the router issues both WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices. A flap is when a route: • is withdrawn • is readvertised after being withdrawn • has an attribute change The constant router reaction to the WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices causes instability in the BGP process.
• • reuse: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed). The default is 750. • suppress: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The default is 2000.
BGP table version is 855562, main routing table version 780266 122836 network entrie(s) and 221664 paths using 29697640 bytes of memory 34298 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 1920688 bytes of memory 29577 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 1384403 bytes of memory 184 BGP community entrie(s) using 7616 bytes of memory Dampening enabled. 0 history paths, 0 dampened paths, 0 penalized paths Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer 10.114.8.34 18508 82883 79977 780266 10.114.8.
To reset a BGP connection using BGP soft reconfiguration, use the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode at the system prompt. When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are reevaluated. With this command, the replay and update process is triggered only if a routerefresh request is not negotiated with the peer.
2 In ROUTER BGP mode, enter the following command: ROUTER BGP Mode shutdown all You can use the no shutdown all command in the ROUTER BGP mode to re-enable all the BGP interface. You can also enable or disable BGP neighbors corresponding to the IPv4 unicast or multicast groups and the IPv6 unicast groups.
NOTE: This behavior applies to all BGP neighbors. Meaning, BGP neighbors that were explicitly disabled before global shutdown also remain in disabled state. Enable these neighbors individually using the no shutdown command. Route Map Continue The BGP route map continue feature, continue [sequence-number], (in ROUTE-MAP mode) allows movement from one routemap entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number).
• If the peer has not been activated in any AFI/SAFI, the peer remains in Idle state. Most Dell Networking OS BGP IPv4 unicast commands are extended to support the IPv4 multicast RIB using extra options to the command. For a detailed description of the MBGP commands, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. • Enables support for the IPv4 multicast family on the BGP node.
• View information about local BGP state changes and other BGP events. EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] events [in | out] View information about BGP KEEPALIVE messages. EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalive [in | out] View information about BGP notifications received from or sent to neighbors.
Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1395, neighbor version 1394 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), 0 withdrawn by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, 0 withdrawn from peer Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:12, due to Missing well known att
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[3] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[4] : len 19, captured 00:34:22 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 [. . .] Outgoing packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 1/21 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/21 ip address 10.0.1.21/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#int te 1/31 R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#ip address 10.0.3.
R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.128.
! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/11 ip address 10.0.3.33/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.0.2.3/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)# R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.128.0/24 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.
MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1, neighbor version 1 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 1, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 2; dropped 1 Last reset 00:00:57, due to user reset Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:00:57 ago fffffff
2 neighbor(s) using 9216 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 192.168.128.1 99 140 136 2 0 (0) 00:11:24 1 192.168.128.3 100 138 140 2 0 (0) 00:18:31 1 Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 3) R3#conf R3(conf)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.
Last read 00:00:45, last write 00:00:44 Hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 138 messages, 0 in queue 7 opens, 2 notifications, 7 updates 122 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 140 messages, 0 in queue Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) 223
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. CAM Allocation CAM Allocation for Ingress To allocate the space for regions such has L2 ingress ACL, IPV4 ingress ACL, IPV6 ingress ACL, IPV4 QoS, L2 QoS, PBR, VRF ACL, and so forth, use the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode.
NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 256 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 128 entries. Select 2 to configure 256 entries.
cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number ecfmacl number nlbcluster number ipv4pbr number openflow number | fcoe number iscsioptacl number [vrfv4acl number] NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3 Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4 Reload the system.
NOTE: If you select the CAM profile from CONFIGURATION mode, the output of this command does not reflect any changes until you save the running-configuration and reload the chassis. Example of show running-config cam-profile Command Dell#show running-config cam-profile ! cam-profile default microcode default Dell# View CAM-ACL Settings The show cam-acl command shows the cam-acl setting that will be loaded after the next reload.
-- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl
View CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv4Flow and Layer 2 ACL sub- partitions) using the show cam-usage command in EXEC Privilege mode The following output shows CAM blocks usage for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs and other processes that use CAM space: Example of the show cam-usage Command Dell#show cam-usage Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============|===
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 26. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 4200 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
CoPP policies are configured by creating extended ACL rules and specifying rate-limits through QoS policies. The ACLs and QoS policies are assigned as service-policies. Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS).
8 Assign the protocol based the service policy on the control plane. Enabling this command on a port-pipe automatically enables the ACL and QoS rules creates with the cpu-qos keyword. CONTROL-PLANE mode service-policy rate-limit-protocols Examples of Configuring CoPP for Different Protocols The following example shows creating the IP/IPv6/MAC extended ACL.
Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class-ipv6 qos-policy rate_limit_200k Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell(conf)#control-plane-cpuqos Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#service-policy rate-limit-protocols egressFP_rate_policy Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#exit Configuring CoPP for CPU Queues Controlling traffic on the CPU queues does not require ACL rules, but does require QoS policies.
The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell#conf Dell(conf)#control-plane Dell(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy CoPP for OSPFv3 Packets You can create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for OSPFv3, in addition to the CoPP support for VRRP, BGP, and ICMP. You can use the ipv6 access-list name cpu-qos permit ospfv3 command to allow CoPP traffic for OSPFv3.
As part of enhancements, CPU queues are increased from 8 to 12 on CPU port. However, the front-end port and the backplane ports support only 8 queues. As a result, when packets are transmitted to the local CPU, the CPU uses Q0-Q11 queues. The control packets that are tunneled to the master unit are isolated from the data queues and the control queues in the backplane links. Control traffic must be sent over the control queues Q4-Q7 on higig links.
• NDP Packets in VLT peer routing enable • • VLT peer routing enable cases each VLT node will have route entry for link local address of both self and peer VLT node. Peer VLT link local entry will have egress port as ICL link. And Actual link local address will have entry to CopyToCpu. But NDP packets destined to peer VLT node needs to be taken to CPU and tunneled to the peer VLT node..
unicast packets. This CLI knob to turn off the catch-all route is of use in networks where the user does not want to generate Destination Unreachable messages and have the CPU queue’s bandwidth available for higher priority control-plane traffic. Configuring CoPP for OSPFv3 You can create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for OSPFv3, in addition to the CoPP support for VRRPv3, BGPv6, and ICMPv6.
Viewing Queue Rates Example of Viewing Queue Rates Dell#show cpu-queue rate cp Service-Queue Rate (PPS) -------------- ----------Q0 1300 Q1 300 Q2 300 Q3 300 Q4 2000 Q5 400 Q6 400 Q7 1100 Dell# Example of Viewing Queue Mapping To view the queue mapping for each configured protocol, use the show ip protocol-queue-mapping command.
Dell# 240 Control Plane Policing (CoPP)
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks. NOTE: DCB is not supported when you use 10GBaseT ports for stacking.
DCB refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. Through network consolidation, DCB results in reduced operational cost, simplified management, and easy scalability by avoiding the need to deploy separate application-specific networks.
Figure 27. Illustration of Traffic Congestion The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: • FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. • iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: • PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface.
Figure 28. Enhanced Transmission Selection The following table lists the traffic groupings ETS uses to select multiprotocol traffic for transmission. Table 13. ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group. The range is from 0 to 7 configurable; 8 - 14 reservation and 15.0 - 15.7 is strict priority group.. Group bandwidth Percentage of available bandwidth allocated to a priority group.
ETS parameters ETS Configuration TLV and ETS Recommendation TLV. Data Center Bridging in a Traffic Flow The following figure shows how DCB handles a traffic flow on an interface. Figure 29. DCB PFC and ETS Traffic Handling Enabling Data Center Bridging DCB is automatically configured when you configure FCoE or iSCSI optimization. Data center bridging supports converged enhanced Ethernet (CEE) in a data center network. DCB is disabled by default. It must be enabled to support CEE.
dcb enable 2 Set PFC buffering on the DCB stack unit. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#dcb enable pfc-queues NOTE: To save the pfc buffering configuration changes, save the configuration and reboot the system. NOTE: Dell Networking OS Behavior: DCB is not supported if you enable link-level flow control on one or more interfaces. For more information, refer to Ethernet Pause Frames.
If you delete the dot1p priority-priority group mapping (no priority pgid command) before you apply the new DCB map, the default PFC and ETS parameters are applied on the interfaces. This change may create a DCB mismatch with peer DCB devices and interrupt network operation. Data Center Bridging: Default Configuration Before you configure PFC and ETS on a switch see the priority group setting taken into account the following default settings: DCB is enabled. PFC and ETS are globally enabled by default.
The pfc on command enables priority-based flow control. 3 Specify the dot1p priority-to-priority group mapping for each priority. priority-pgid dot1p0_group_num dot1p1_group_num ...dot1p7_group_num Priority group range is from 0 to 7. All priorities that map to the same queue must be in the same priority group. Leave a space between each priority group number.
interface type slot/port 2 Configure the port queues that will still function as no-drop queues for lossless traffic. INTERFACE mode pfc no-drop queues queue-range For the dot1p-queue assignments, refer to the dot1p Priority-Queue Assignment table. The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on the switch is two. The range is from 0 to 3. Separate the queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc no-drop queues 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 2-3.
• To disable PFC operation on an interface, use the no pfc mode on command in DCB-Map configuration mode. • Traffic may be interrupted when you reconfigure PFC no-drop priorities in a DCB map or re-apply the DCB map to an interface. • For PFC to be applied, the configured priority traffic must be supported by a PFC peer (as detected by DCBx). • If you apply a DCB map with PFC disabled (pfc off), you can enable link-level flow control on the interface using the flowcontrol rx on tx on command.
Step Task Command Command Mode Dell# interface tengigabitEthernet 1/1 Dell(config-if-te-1/1)# dcb-map SAN_A_dcb_map1 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to apply a DCB map to more than one port. You cannot apply a DCB map on an interface that has been already configured for PFC using thepfc priority command or which is already configured for lossless queues (pfc no-drop queues command).
Port B acting as Egress During the congestion, [traffic pump on priorities 3 and 4 from PORT A and PORT C is at full line rate], PORT A and C send out the PFCs to rate the traffic limit. Egress drops are not observed on Port B since traffic flow on priorities is mapped to loss less queues. Port B acting as Ingress If the traffic congestion is on PORT B , Egress DROP is on PORT A or C, as the PFC is not enabled on PORT B.
Step Task Command Command Mode 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 2-3 Default: No lossless queues are configured. Priority-Based Flow Control Using Dynamic Buffer Method In a data center network, priority-based flow control (PFC) manages large bursts of one traffic type in multiprotocol links so that it does not affect other traffic types and no frames are lost due to congestion. When PFC detects congestion on a queue for a specified priority, it sends a pause frame for the 802.
By default the total available buffer for PFC is 6.6 MB and when you configure dynamic ingress buffering, a minimum of least 52 KB per queue is used when all ports are congested. By default, the system enables a maximum of two lossless queues on the S4820T platform. This default behavior is impacted if you modify the total buffer available for PFC or assign static buffer configurations to the individual PFC queues.
3 4 Dot1p->Queue Mapping Configuration is retained at the default value. Default dot1p-queue mapping is, Dell#show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 Queue : 0 0 0 1 2 3 6 3 7 3 Default dot1p-queue mapping is, Dell#show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 Queue : 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 Interface Configurations on server connected ports. a Enable DCB globally. Dell(conf)#dcb enable b Apply PFC Priority configuration. Configure priorities on which PFC is enabled.
dcb-map dcb-map-name The dcb-map-name variable can have a maximum of 32 characters. 2 Create an ETS priority group. CONFIGURATION mode priority-group group-num {bandwidth bandwidth | strict-priority} pfc off The range for priority group is from 0 to 7. Set the bandwidth in percentage. The percentage range is from 1 to 100% in units of 1%. Committed and peak bandwidth is in megabits per second. The range is from 0 to 40000. Committed and peak burst size is in kilobytes. Default is 50.
ETS Operation with DCBx The following section describes DCBx negotiation with peer ETS devices. In DCBx negotiation with peer ETS devices, ETS configuration is handled as follows: • ETS TLVs are supported in DCBx versions CIN, CEE, and IEEE2.5. • The DCBx port-role configurations determine the ETS operational parameters (refer to Configure a DCBx Operation). • ETS configurations received from TLVs from a peer are validated.
Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)#exit 5 Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot/port 6 Apply the QoS output policy with the bandwidth percentage for specified priority queues to an egress interface. INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)#service-policy output test12 Configuring ETS in a DCB Map A switch supports the use of a DCB map in which you configure enhanced transmission selection (ETS) setting. To configure ETS parameters, you must apply a DCB map on an interface.
ETS Prerequisites and Restrictions On a switch, ETS is enabled by default on Ethernet ports with equal bandwidth assigned to each 802.1p priority. You can change the default ETS configuration only by using a DCB map.
Strict-priority groups: If two priority groups have strict-priority scheduling, traffic assigned from the priority group with the higher priority-queue number is scheduled first. However, when three priority groups are used and two groups have strictpriority scheduling (such as groups 1 and 3 in the example), the strict priority group whose traffic is mapped to one queue takes precedence over the strict priority group whose traffic is mapped to two queues.
• Accepts the DCB configuration from a peer if a DCBx port is in “willing” mode to accept a peer’s DCB settings and then internally propagates the received DCB configuration to its peer ports. DCBx Port Roles To enable the auto-configuration of DCBx-enabled ports and propagate DCB configurations learned from peer DCBx devices internally to other switch ports, use the following DCBx port roles.
source. If you enable DCBx, ports in Manual mode advertise their configurations to peer devices but do not accept or propagate internal or external configurations. Unlike other user-configured ports, the configuration of DCBx ports in Manual mode is saved in the running configuration. On a DCBx port in a manual role, all PFC, application priority, ETS recommend, and ETS configuration TLVs are enabled.
• The port role is auto-upstream. • The port is enabled with link up and DCBx enabled. • The port has performed a DCBx exchange with a DCBx peer. • The switch is capable of supporting the received DCB configuration values through either a symmetric or asymmetric parameter exchange. A newly elected configuration source propagates configuration changes received from a peer to the other auto-configuration ports.
DCBx Example The following figure shows how to use DCBx. The external 40GbE 40GbE ports on the base module (ports 33 and 37) of two switches are used for uplinks configured as DCBx autoupstream ports. The device is connected to third-party, top-of-rack (ToR) switches through 40GbE uplinks. The ToR switches are part of a Fibre Channel storage network. The internal ports (ports 1-32) connected to the 10GbE backplane are configured as auto-downstream ports.
3 Configure a port to operate in a configuration-source role. 4 Configure ports to operate in a manual role. 1 Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot/port 2 Enter LLDP Configuration mode to enable DCBx operation. INTERFACE mode [no] protocol lldp 3 Configure the DCBx version used on the interface, where: auto configures the port to operate using the DCBx version received from a peer. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.
[no] advertise DCBx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} • fcoe: enables the advertisement of FCoE in Application Priority TLVs. • iscsi: enables the advertisement of iSCSI in Application Priority TLVs. The default is Application Priority TLVs are enabled to advertise FCoE and iSCSI. NOTE: To disable TLV transmission, use the no form of the command; for example, no advertise DCBx-applntlv iscsi.
5 Configure the Application Priority TLVs that advertise on unconfigured interfaces with a manual port-role. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] advertise DCBx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} • fcoe: enables the advertisement of FCoE in Application Priority TLVs. • iscsi: enables the advertisement of iSCSI in Application Priority TLVs. The default is Application Priority TLVs are enabled and advertise FCoE and iSCSI.
• all: enables all DCBx debugging operations. • auto-detect-timer: enables traces for DCBx auto-detect timers. • config-exchng: enables traces for DCBx configuration exchanges. • fail: enables traces for DCBx failures. • mgmt: enables traces for DCBx management frames. • resource: enables traces for DCBx system resource frames. • sem: enables traces for the DCBx state machine. • tlv: enables traces for DCBx TLVs.
The following example shows the show dcb command. Dell# show dcb stack-unit 0 port-set 0 DCB Status : Enabled PFC Port Count : 56 (current), 56 (configured) PFC Queue Count : 2 (current), 2 (configured) The following example shows the show qos priority-groups command. Dell#show qos priority-groups priority-group ipc priority-list 4 set-pgid 2 The following example shows the output of the show qos dcb-map test command.
ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 0 Input TLV pkts, 1 Output TLV pkts, 0 Error pkts, 0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts The following table describes the show interface pfc summary command fields. Table 19. show interface pfc summary Command Description Fields Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number.
Fields Description Application Priority TLV: Local ISCSI Priority Map Priority bitmap used by local DCBx port in ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs. Application Priority TLV: Remote FCOE Priority Map Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from remote peer port: enabled or disabled. Application Priority TLV: Remote ISCSI Priority Map Status of iSCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from remote peer port: enabled or disabled.
PG-grp Priority# BW-% BW-COMMITTED BW-PEAK TSA % Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 3 25 ETS 1 4 25 ETS 2 0,1,2,5,6,7 50 ETS 3 4 5 6 7 Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled The following example shows the show interface ets detail command.
3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Pkts ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields. Table 20.
The following example shows the show stack-unit all stack-ports all pfc details command.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/12 Remote Mac Address 00:01:e8:8a:df:a0 Port Role is Manual DCBx Operational Status is Enabled Is Configuration Source? FALSE Local DCBx Compatibility mode is IEEEv2.5 Local DCBx Configured mode is IEEEv2.5 Peer Operating version is IEEEv2.
Field Description DCBx Operational Status Operational status (enabled or disabled) used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration. The DCBx operational status is the combination of PFC and ETS operational status. Configuration Source Specifies whether the port serves as the DCBx configuration source on the switch: true (yes) or false (no). Local DCBx Compatibility mode DCBx version accepted in a DCB configuration as compatible.
Figure 31. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Priority Group Assignment 5 LAN 6 LAN 7 LAN The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic.
NOTE: Dell Networking does not recommend mapping all ingress traffic to a single queue when using PFC and ETS. However, Dell Networking does recommend using Ingress traffic classification using the service-class dynamic dot1p command (honor dot1p) on all DCB-enabled interfaces.
CONFIGURATION mode dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size value dcb pfc-total-buffer-size value The buffer size range is from 0 to 3399. Default is 3088. 3 Configure the number of PFC queues. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable pfc-queues pfc-queues The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured depends on the buffer. The default number of PFC queues in the system is two.
13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
The following table lists common DHCP options. Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
Option Number and Description User Port Stacking Option 230 Set the stacking option variable to provide DHCP server stack-port detail when the DHCP offer is set. End Option 255 Signals the last option in the DHCP packet. Assign an IP Address using DHCP The following section describes DHCP and the client in a network. When a client joins a network: 1 The client initially broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message on the subnet to discover available DHCP servers.
Implementation Information The following describes DHCP implementation. • Dell Networking implements DHCP based on RFC 2131 and RFC 3046. • IP source address validation is a sub-feature of DHCP Snooping; the Dell Networking OS uses access control lists (ACLs) internally to implement this feature and as such, you cannot apply ACLs to an interface which has IP source address validation.
Configuring the Server for Automatic Address Allocation Automatic address allocation is an address assignment method by which the DHCP server leases an IP address to a client from a pool of available addresses. An address pool is a range of IP addresses that the DHCP server may assign. The subnet number indexes the address pools. To create an address pool, follow these steps. 1 Access the DHCP server CLI context. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp server 2 Create an address pool and give it a name.
Excluding Addresses from the Address Pool The DHCP server assumes that all IP addresses in a DHCP address pool are available for assigning to DHCP clients. You must specify the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients. To exclude an address, follow this step. • Exclude an address range from DHCP assignment. The exclusion applies to all configured pools. DHCP mode excluded-address Specifying an Address Lease Time To specify an address lease time, use the following command.
Using NetBIOS WINS for Address Resolution Windows internet naming service (WINS) is a name resolution service that Microsoft DHCP clients use to correlate host names to IP addresses within a group of networks. Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four types of NetBIOS nodes: broadcast, peer-to-peer, mixed, or hybrid. 1 Specify the NetBIOS WINS name servers, in order of preference, that are available to Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients.
Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. • Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding • Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ip address Configure the System to be a Relay Agent DHCP clients and servers request and offer configuration information via broadcast DHCP messages.
Figure 34. Configuring a Relay Agent To view the ip helper-address configuration for an interface, use the show ip interface command from EXEC privilege mode. Example of the show ip interface Command R1_E600#show ip int tengigabitethernet 1/3 TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 is up, line protocol is down Internet address is 10.11.0.1/24 Broadcast address is 10.11.0.255 Address determined by user input IP MTU is 1500 bytes Helper address is 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.
Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server. Implement the DHCP client functionality as follows: • The switch can obtain a dynamically assigned IP address from a DHCP server. A start-up configuration is not received. Use bare metal provisioning (BMP) to receive configuration parameters (Dell Networking OS version and a configuration file). BMP is enabled as a factory-default setting on a switch.
DHCP Snooping A DHCP client can run on a switch simultaneously with the DHCP snooping feature as follows: • If you enable DHCP snooping globally on a switch and you enable a DHCP client on an interface, the trust port, source MAC address, and snooping table validations are not performed on the interface by DHCP snooping for packets destined to the DHCP client daemon. The following criteria determine packets destined for the DHCP client: • • DHCP is enabled on the interface.
Configure the System for User Port Stacking (Option 230) Set the stacking-option variable to provide stack-port detail on the DHCP server when you set the DHCP offer. A stack can be formed when the units are connected. Option 230 is the option for user port stacking. Use it to create up to eight stack groups. Define the configuration parameters on the DHCP server for each chassis based on the chassis MAC address.
ip dhcp relay information-option [trust-downstream] For routers between the relay agent and the DHCP server, enter the trust-downstream option. • Manually reset the remote ID for Option 82. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp relay information-option remote-id DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping protects networks from spoofing. In the context of DHCP snooping, ports are either trusted or not trusted. By default, all ports are not trusted. Trusted ports are ports through which attackers cannot connect.
ip dhcp snooping vlan name Enabling IPv6 DHCP Snooping To enable IPv6 DHCP snooping, use the following commands. 1 Enable IPv6 DHCP snooping globally. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 dhcp snooping 2 Specify ports connected to IPv6 DHCP servers as trusted. INTERFACE mode ipv6 dhcp snooping trust 3 Enable IPv6 DHCP snooping on a VLAN or range of VLANs.
EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding Dell# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database Displaying the Contents of the Binding Table To display the contents of the binding table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode show ip dhcp snooping Example of the show ip dhcp snooping Command View the DHCP snooping statistics with the show ip dhcp snooping command.
Debugging the IPv6 DHCP To debug the IPv6 DHCP, use the following command. • Display debug information for IPV6 DHCP. EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 dhcp IPv6 DHCP Snooping MAC-Address Verification Configure to enable verify source mac-address in the DHCP packet against the mac address stored in the snooping binding table. • Enable IPV6 DHCP snooping .
To view the number of entries in the table, use the show ip dhcp snooping binding command. This output displays the snooping binding table created using the ACK packets from the trusted port. Dell#show ip dhcp snooping binding Codes : S - Static D - Dynamic IP Address MAC Address Expires(Sec) Type VLAN Interface ================================================================ 10.1.1.251 00:00:4d:57:f2:50 172800 D Vl 10 Te 1/2 10.1.1.252 00:00:4d:57:e6:f6 172800 D Vl 10 Te 1/1 10.1.1.
NOTE: Dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) uses entries in the L2SysFlow CAM region, a sub-region of SystemFlow. One CAM entry is required for every DAI-enabled VLAN. You can enable DAI on up to 16 VLANs on a system. However, the ExaScale default CAM profile allocates only nine entries to the L2SysFlow region for DAI. You can configure 10 to 16 DAI-enabled VLANs by allocating more CAM space to the L2SysFlow region before enabling DAI. SystemFlow has 102 entries by default.
To bypass the ARP inspection, use the following command. • Specify an interface as trusted so that ARPs are not validated against the binding table. INTERFACE mode arp inspection-trust Dynamic ARP inspection is supported on Layer 2 and Layer 3. Source Address Validation Using the DHCP binding table, Dell Networking OS can perform three types of source address validation (SAV). Table 23.
NOTE: Before enabling SAV With VLAN option, allocate at least one FP block to the ipmacacl CAM region. DHCP MAC Source Address Validation DHCP MAC source address validation (SAV) validates a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Dell Networking OS ensures that the packet’s source MAC address is checked against the CHADDR field in the DHCP header only for packets from snooped VLANs. • Enable DHCP MAC SAV.
Viewing the Number of SAV Dropped Packets The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters command displays the number of SAV dropped packets.
14 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features. To adjust the ExaScale behavior to match TeraScale, use the following command.
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
Interface Te 1/1 Te 1/1 Line Protocol Up Up Utilization[In Percent] 36 52 Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system.
• Modify the threshold for monitoring ECMP group bundles. CONFIGURATION mode link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold {percent} The range is from 1 to 90%. • The default is 60%. Display details for an ECMP group bundle. EXEC mode show link-bundle-distribution ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. Viewing an ECMP Group NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network.
ipv6-over-ipv4 Payload header ipv4-over-gre-ipv4 Payload header ipv6-over-gre-ipv4 Payload header ipv4-over-gre-ipv6 Payload header ipv6-over-gre-ipv6 Payload header mac-in-mac header based hashing is disabled TcpUdp Load Balancing Enabled Dell(conf)# • Packet Header parameters for the first portion of the RTAG7 hash can be controlled. By default, all the listed parameters from the Packet header are considered for hash computation. Few parameters [on demand] can be removed using the given CLIs.
Figure 35. Before Polarization Effect Router B performs the same hash as router A and all the traffic goes through the same path to router D, while no traffic is redirected to router E. Some of the anti-polarization techniques used generally to mitigate unequal traffic distribution in LAG/ECMP as follows: 1 Configuring different hash-seed values at each node - Hash seed is the primary parameter in hash computations that determine distribution of traffic among the ECMP paths.
crc32LSB xor1 of xor1 xor2 of xor2 xor4 of xor4 xor8 of xor8 xor16 CRC32_LOWER - LSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR1 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR2 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR4 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CR16 - 16 bit XOR] Example to view show hash-algorithm: Dell(conf)#hash-algorithm ecmp flow-based-hashing crc16 Dell(co
15 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
FIP enables FCoE devices to discover one another, initialize and maintain virtual links over an Ethernet network, and access storage devices in a storage area network (SAN). FIP satisfies the Fibre Channel requirement for point-to-point connections by creating a unique virtual link for each connection between an FCoE end-device and an FCF via a transit switch. FIP provides functionality for discovering and logging into an FCF.
Figure 37. FIP Discovery and Login Between an ENode and an FCF FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges In a converged Ethernet network, intermediate Ethernet bridges can snoop on FIP packets during the login process on an FCF. Then, using ACLs, a transit bridge can permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. An Ethernet bridge that provides these functions is called a FIP snooping bridge (FSB).
Figure 38. FIP Snooping on a Dell Networking Switch The following sections describe how to configure the FIP snooping feature on a switch: • Allocate CAM resources for FCoE. • Perform FIP snooping (allowing and parsing FIP frames) globally on all VLANs or on a per-VLAN basis. • To assign a MAC address to an FCoE end-device (server ENode or storage device) after a server successfully logs in, set the FCoE MAC address prefix (FC-MAP) value an FCF uses.
FIP Snooping in a Switch Stack FIP snooping supports switch stacking as follows: • A switch stack configuration is synchronized with the standby stack unit. • Dynamic population of the FCoE database (ENode, Session, and FCF tables) is synchronized with the standby stack unit. The FCoE database is maintained by snooping FIP keep-alive messages. • In case of a failover, the new master switch starts the required timers for the FCoE database tables. Timers run only on the master stack unit.
• You can configure multiple FCF-trusted interfaces in a VLAN. • When you disable FIP snooping: • • ACLs are not installed, FIP and FCoE traffic is not blocked, and FIP packets are not processed. • The existing per-VLAN and FIP snooping configuration is stored. The configuration is re-applied the next time you enable the FIP snooping feature. You must apply the CAM-ACL space for the FCoE region before enabling the FIP-Snooping feature.
Enable FIP Snooping on VLANs You can enable FIP snooping globally on a switch on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. When you enable FIP snooping on VLANs: • FIP frames are allowed to pass through the switch on the enabled VLANs and are processed to generate FIP snooping ACLs. • FCoE traffic is allowed on VLANs only after a successful virtual-link initialization (fabric login FLOGI) between an ENode and an FCF. All other FCoE traffic is dropped.
Table 25. Impact of Enabling FIP Snooping Impact Description MAC address learning MAC address learning is not performed on FIP and FCoE frames, which are denied by ACLs dynamically created by FIP snooping on server-facing ports in ENode mode. MTU auto-configuration MTU size is set to mini-jumbo (2500 bytes) when a port is in Switchport mode, the FIP snooping feature is enabled on the switch, and FIP snooping is enabled on all or individual VLANs.
4 Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. CONFIGURATION mode. feature fip-snooping 5 Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode or VLAN INTERFACE mode. fip-snooping enable 6 Configure the port for bridge-to-FCF links. INTERFACE mode or CONFIGURATION mode fip-snooping port-mode fcf NOTE: To disable the FCoE transit feature or FIP snooping on VLANs, use the no version of a command; for example, no feature fip-snooping or no fip-snooping enable.
Examples of the show fip-snooping Commands The following example shows the show fip-snooping sessions command.
Table 28. show fip-snooping enode Command Description Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode. ENode Interface Slot/port number of the interface connected to the ENode. FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF. The following example shows the show fip-snooping fcf command. Dell# show fip-snooping fcf FCF MAC FCF Interface VLAN FC-MAP FKA_ADV_PERIOD No.
Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 Dell(conf)# Dell# show fip-snooping statistics int tengigabitethernet 1/11 Number of Vlan Requests :1 Number of Vlan Notifications :0 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits :1 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits :0 Number of FLOGI :1 Number of FDISC :16 Number of FLOGO :0 Number of Enode Keep Alive :4416 Number of VN Port Keep Alive :3136 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement :0 Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement :0 Number of FLOGI Accepts :
Field Description Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Number of FIP-snooped FLOGI request frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Number of FIP-snooped FDISC request frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGO Number of FIP-snooped FLOGO frames received on the interface. Number of ENode Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped ENode keep-alive frames received on the interface.
FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 39. Configuration Example: FIP Snooping on a Switch In this example, DCBx and PFC are enabled on the FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch.
Example of Configuring the ENode Server-Facing Port Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# protocol lldp Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-lldp)# dcbx port-role auto-downstream NOTE: A port is enabled by default for bridge-ENode links.
16 FIPS Cryptography Federal information processing standard (FIPS) cryptography provides cryptographic algorithms conforming to various FIPS standards published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), a non-regulatory agency of the US Department of Commerce. FIPS mode is also validated for numerous platforms to meet the FIPS-140-2 standard for a software-based cryptographic module. This chapter describes how to enable FIPS cryptography requirements on Dell Networking platforms.
Enabling FIPS Mode To enable or disable FIPS mode, use the console port. Secure the host attached to the console port against unauthorized access. Any attempts to enable or disable FIPS mode from a virtual terminal session are denied. When you enable FIPS mode, the following actions are taken: • If enabled, the SSH server is disabled. • All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, are closed.
Examples of the show fips status and show system Commands The following example shows the show fips status command. Dell#show fips status FIPS Mode : Enabled for the system using the show system command. The following example shows the show system command. Disabling FIPS Mode When you disable FIPS mode, the following changes occur: • The SSH server disables. • All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, close.
17 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
The Control VLAN is used to perform the health checks on the ring. The Control VLAN can always pass through all ports in the ring, including the secondary port of the Master node. Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring.
Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch A member VLAN can span two rings interconnected by a common switch, in a figure-eight style topology. A switch can act as a Master node for one FRRP group and a Transit for another FRRP group, or it can be a Transit node for both rings. In the following example, FRRP 101 is a ring with its own Control VLAN, and FRRP 202 has its own Control VLAN running on another ring. A Member VLAN that spans both rings is added as a Member VLAN to both FRRP groups.
• One Master node per ring — all other nodes are Transit. • Each node has two member interfaces — primary and secondary. • There is no limit to the number of nodes on a ring. • Master node ring port states — blocking, pre-forwarding, forwarding, and disabled. • Transit node ring port states — blocking, pre-forwarding, forwarding, and disabled. • STP disabled on ring interfaces. • Master node secondary port is in blocking state during Normal operation.
Concept Explanation • Hello RHF (HRHF) — These frames are processed only on the Master node’s Secondary port. The Transit nodes pass the HRHF through without processing it. An HRHF is sent at every Hello interval. • Topology Change RHF (TCRHF) — These frames contains ring status, keepalive, and the control and member VLAN hash. The TCRHF is processed at each node of the ring.
Configuring the Control VLAN Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as control or member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to Layer 2. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports.
CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as Control or Member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to the Layer 2 chapter. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • Tag control VLAN ports. Member VLAN ports, except the Primary/Secondary interface, can be tagged or untagged.
no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode. timer {hello-interval|dead-interval} milliseconds • Hello-Interval: the range is from 50 to 2000, in increments of 50 (default is 500). • Dead-Interval: the range is from 50 to 6000, in increments of 50 (default is 1500).
show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • • • • • • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only. Spanning Tree (if you enable it globally) must be disabled on both Primary and Secondary interfaces when you enable FRRP.
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 2/14 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 10
Figure 41. FRRP Ring Connecting VLT Devices You can also configure an FRRP ring where both the VLT peers are connected to the FRRP ring and the VLTi acts as the primary interface for the FRRP Master and transit nodes. This active-active FRRP configuration blocks the FRRP ring on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis enabling the configuration to spawn across different set of VLANs.
In the FRRP ring R2, the primary interface for VLT Node1 (transit node) is the VLTi. P1 is the secondary interface, which is an orphan port that is participating in the FRRP ring topology. V1 is the control VLAN through which the RFHs are exchanged indicating the health of the nodes and the FRRP ring itself. In addition to the control VLAN, multiple member VLANS are configured (for example, M11 through Mn) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings.
18 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and deregister attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
• Configure GVRP Registration • Configure a GARP Timer • RPM Redundancy Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 43.
Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch. CONFIGURATION mode gvrp enable Example of Configuring GVRP Dell(conf)#protocol gvrp Dell(config-gvrp)#no disable Dell(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable Dell(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command.
Based on the configuration in the following example, the interface is not removed from VLAN 34 or VLAN 35 despite receiving a GVRP Leave message. Additionally, the interface is not dynamically added to VLAN 45 or VLAN 46, even if a GVRP Join message is received.
• Automatic and Manual RPM Failover • Support for RPM Redundancy by Dell Networking OS Version • RPM Synchronization GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) 343
19 High Availability (HA) High availability (HA) is supported on Dell Networking OS. HA is a collection of features that preserves system continuity by maximizing uptime and minimizing packet loss during system disruptions. To support all the features within the HA collection, you should have the latest boot code. The following table lists the boot code requirements as of this Dell Networking OS release. Table 31. Boot Code Requirements Component Boot Code S4820T 1 2.0.
• • • • • Boot the Chassis with a Single RPM Boot the Chassis with Dual RPMs Automatic and Manual RPM Failover Support for RPM Redundancy by Dell Networking OS Version RPM Synchronization Boot the Chassis with a Single RPM You can boot the chassis with one RPM and later add a second RPM, which automatically becomes the standby RPM. Dell Networking OS displays the following message when the standby RPM is online.
* * This RPM -> 7.4.2.0 * Peer RPM -> 7.4.1.0 * ************************************************ 00:00:12: Different 00:00:12: 00:00:14: %RPM0-U:CP %IRC-4-IRC_VERSION: Current RPM 7.4.2.0 Peer RPM 7.4.1.0 software version detected %RPM0-U:CP %IRC-6-IRC_COMMUP: Link to peer RPM is up %RPM0-U:CP %RAM-6-ELECTION_ROLE: RPM0 is transitioning to Primary RPM. Example of Boot Failure on Standby RPM System failed to boot up.
STP: SPAN: no block sync done no block sync done Dell# Support for RPM Redundancy by Dell Networking OS Version Dell Networking OS supports increasing levels of RPM redundancy (warm and hot) as described in the table below. Table 33. Support for RPM Redundancy by Dell Networking OS Version Platform Failover Type Failover Behavior S4820T Hot Failover Only the failed RPM reboots. All the line cards and SFMs remain online. All application tasks are spawned on the secondary RPM before failover.
EXEC Privilege mode redundancy force-failover stack-unit Example of the redundancy force-failover stack-unit Command Dell#redundancy force-failover stack-unit System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: yes Proceed with Stack-unit hot failover [confirm yes/no]:yes Dell# Specifying an Auto-Failover Limit When a non-recoverable fatal error is detected, an automatic failover occurs.
----------------------------------------------------------0 active online 7-5-1-71 1 not present %RPM0-P:CP %POLLMGR-2-ALT_RPM_STATE: Alternate RPM is present %RPM0-P:CP %IRC-6-IRC_COMMUP: Link to peer RPM is up %RPM1-S:CP %RAM-5-RPM_STATE: RPM1 is in Standby State Dell#show rpm all -- Route Processor Modules -Slot Status NxtBoot Version ------------------------------------------------------------0 active online 7-5-1-71 1 standby online 7-5-1-71 Linecard Online Insertion and Removal Dell Networking OS det
Status : not present Dell#con Dell(conf)#stack-unit 1 provision S4820T Dell(conf)#end Dell#show system stack-unit 1 -- Unit 1 -Unit Type Status Required Type : Member Unit : not present : S4820T - 52-port GE/TE/FG (SE) Dell# Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/0 Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)# Removing a Provisioned Logical Stack Unit To remove the line card configuration, use the following command.
• Intermediate system to intermediate system Software Resiliency During normal operations, Dell Networking OS monitors the health of both hardware and software components in the background to identify potential failures, even before these failures manifest. Software Component Health Monitoring On each of the line cards and the stack unit, there are a number of software components.
System Log Event messages provide system administrators diagnostics and auditing information. Dell Networking OS sends event messages to the internal buffer, all terminal lines, the console, and optionally to a syslog server. For more information about event messages and configurable options, refer to Management. Hot-Lock Behavior Dell Networking OS hot-lock features allow you to append and delete their corresponding content addressable memory (CAM) entries dynamically without disrupting traffic.
EXEC Privilege When a process restarts, FTOS displays a message similar to the following message. [9/18 23:22:21] TME-(tme): Starting to restart the failed process tacplus [9/18 23:22:41] TME-(tme): Finishing restarting the failed process tacplus You can specify the timestamp in hour(s) so that if the number of attempts to restart exceeds the maximum allowed within this timestamp, Restart mode is changed into Failover mode from that moment forward.
20 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
leaves a multicast group by sending an IGMP message to its IGMP Querier. The querier is the router that surveys a subnet for multicast receivers and processes survey responses to populate the multicast routing table. IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 44.
3 Any remaining hosts respond to the query according to the delay timer mechanism (refer to Adjusting Query and Response Timers). If no hosts respond (because there are none remaining in the group), the querier waits a specified period and sends another query. If it still receives no response, the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet. IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2.
Figure 46. IGMP Version 3–Capable Multicast Routers Address Structure Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1 The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2 The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1.
Figure 47. Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1 Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary.
Figure 48. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1 Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2 Enable a multicast routing protocol.
Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. • View IGMP-enabled interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface Example of the show ip igmp interface Command Dell#show ip igmp interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/10 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 165.87.34.
EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups Example of the show ip igmp groups Command Dell# show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface 225.1.1.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 225.1.2.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Mode IGMPV2 IGMPV2 Uptime 00:11:19 00:10:19 Expires 00:01:50 00:01:50 Last Reporter 165.87.34.100 165.87.31.100 Adjusting Timers The following sections describe viewing and adjusting timers.
Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value). Then, after no response, it removes the group from the outgoing interface for the subnet. IGMP immediate leave reduces leave latency by enabling a router to immediately delete the group membership on an interface after receiving a Leave message (it does not send any group-specific or group-and-source queries before deleting the entry).
• Disable snooping on a VLAN.
Specifying a Port as Connected to a Multicast Router To statically specify or view a port in a VLAN, use the following commands. • Statically specify a port in a VLAN as connected to a multicast router. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip igmp snooping mrouter • View the ports that are connected to multicast routers. EXEC Privilege mode. show ip igmp snooping mrouter Configuring the Switch as Querier To configure the switch as a querier, use the following command.
Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes When a port transitions to the Forwarding state as a result of an STP or MSTP topology change, Dell Networking OS sends a general query out of all ports except the multicast router ports. The host sends a response to the general query and the forwarding database is updated without having to wait for the query interval to expire.
Table 34.
When the feature is enabled using the management egress-interface-selection command, the following events are performed: • The CLI prompt changes to the EIS mode. • In this mode, you can run the application and no application commands • Applications can be configured or unconfigured as management applications using the application or no application command. All configured applications are considered as management applications and the rest of them as non-management applications.
Handling of Switch-Initiated Traffic When the control processor (CP) initiates a control packet, the following processing occurs: • TCP/UDP port number is extracted from the sockaddr structure in the in_selectsrc call which is called as part of the connect system call or in the ip_output function.
• If route lookup in the EIS routing table fails or if the management port is down, then packets are dropped. The management application drop counter is incremented. • Whenever IP address is assigned to the management port, it is stored in a global variable in the IP stack, which is used for comparison with the source IP address of the packet. • Rest of the response traffic is handled as per existing behavior by doing route lookup in the default routing table.
Traffic type / Application type Switch initiated traffic Switch-destined traffic only. No change in the existing behavior.
Table 36.
Table 37.
• Designate an interface as a multicast router interface.
21 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell 40G optics are set to error-disabled state.
• Egress Interface Selection (EIS) • Management Interfaces • VLAN Interfaces • Loopback Interfaces • Null Interfaces • Port Channel Interfaces • Bulk Configuration • Defining Interface Range Macros • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces • Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics • Link Dampening • Link Bundle Monitoring • Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control • Configure the MTU Size on an Interface • Port-Pipes • Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces • Vi
This command has options to display the interface status, IP and MAC addresses, and multiple counters for the amount and type of traffic passing through the interface. If you configured a port channel interface, this command lists the interfaces configured in the port channel. NOTE: To end output from the system, such as the output from the show interfaces command, enter CTRL+C and Dell Networking OS returns to the command prompt.
To determine which physical interfaces are available, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode. This command displays all physical interfaces available on the system. Dell#show running Current Configuration ...
Enabling Energy Efficient Ethernet Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) is an IEEE 802.3 az standard that reduces power consumptions on Ethernet ports. EEE stops the transmission when there is no data to be transmitted and resumes the transmission at the arrival of new packets. You can enable EEE only on ten Gigabit native or optional module copper ports. 1 To enable EEE, use the eee command.
show hardware counters interface-type slot/port show hardware stack-unit stack-unit-number unit unit-number counters Examples of the show Commands The following example shows the status information for all the interfaces.
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX 380 - Unicast Packet Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame C
TX - RUNT Frame Counter TX - Fragment Counter TX - PFC Frame Priority 0 TX - PFC Frame Priority 1 TX - PFC Frame Priority 2 TX - PFC Frame Priority 3 TX - PFC Frame Priority 4 TX - PFC Frame Priority 5 TX - PFC Frame Priority 6 TX - PFC Frame Priority 7 TX - Debug Counter 0 TX - Debug Counter 1 TX - Debug Counter 2 TX - Debug Counter 3 TX - Debug Counter 4 TX - Debug Counter 5 TX - Debug Counter 6 TX - Debug Counter 7 TX - Debug Counter 8 TX - Debug Counter 9 TX - Debug Counter 10 TX - Debug Counter 11 TX -
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - PFC Frame Priority 5 PFC Frame Priority 6 PFC Frame Priority 7 Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1 Debug Counter 2 Debug Counter 3 Debug Counter 4 Debug Counter 5 Debug Counter 6 Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 EEE LPI Event Counter EEE LPI Duration Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame C
EXEC Privilege mode • clear counters eee Clear the EEE counters on the specified port. EXEC Privilege mode • clear counters interface-type slot/port eee Clear the EEE counters on the specified range of ports. EXEC Privilege mode clear counters interface-type slot/port-range eee Examples of the clear counters eee Command When you use this command, confirm that you want Dell Networking OS to clear the EEE counters.
Configuration Task List for Physical Interfaces By default, all interfaces are operationally disabled and traffic does not pass through them.
Example of a Basic Layer 2 Interface Configuration Dell(conf-if)#show config ! interface Port-channel 1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if)# Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode To configure an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode. INTERFACE mode switchport To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode, use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode.
To determine the configuration of an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or the various show interface commands in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Interface) Mode To assign an IP address, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode • no shutdown Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask [secondary] The ip-address must be in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask must be in slash format (/xx).
• • If a route in the EIS table conflicts with a front-end port route, the front-end port route has precedence. Due to protocol, ARP packets received through the management port create two ARP entries (one for the lookup in the EIS table and one for the default routing table). Configuring EIS EIS is compatible with the following protocols: DNS, FTP, NTP, RADIUS, sFlow, SNMP, SSH, Syslog, TACACS, Telnet, and TFTP. To enable and configure EIS, use the following commands: 1 Enter EIS mode.
displays. If you enable auto-configuration, all IPv6 addresses on that management interface are auto-configured. The first IPv6 address that you configure on the management interface is the primary address. If deleted, you must re-add it; the secondary address is not promoted. The following rules apply to having two IPv6 addresses on a management interface: • IPv6 addresses on a single management interface cannot be in the same subnet.
Configuring a Management Interface on an Ethernet Port You can manage the system through any port using remote access such as Telnet. To configure an IP address for the port, use the following commands. There is no separate management routing table, so configure all routes in the IP routing table (the ip route command). • Configure an IP address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • The interface is the management interface.
Dell Networking OS supports Inter-VLAN routing (Layer 3 routing in VLANs). You can add IP addresses to VLANs and use them in routing protocols in the same manner that physical interfaces are used. For more information about configuring different routing protocols, refer to the chapters on the specific protocol. A consideration for including VLANs in routing protocols is that you must configure the no shutdown command. (For routing traffic to flow, you must enable the VLAN.
Null Interfaces The Null interface is another virtual interface. There is only one Null interface. It is always up, but no traffic is transmitted through this interface. To enter INTERFACE mode of the Null interface, use the following command. • Enter INTERFACE mode of the Null interface. CONFIGURATION mode interface null 0 The only configurable command in INTERFACE mode of the Null interface is the ip unreachable command.
There are 128 port-channels with 16 members per channel. As soon as you configure a port channel, Dell Networking OS treats it like a physical interface. For example, IEEE 802.1Q tagging is maintained while the physical interface is in the port channel. Member ports of a LAG are added and programmed into the hardware in a predictable order based on the port ID, instead of in the order in which the ports come up. With this implementation, load balancing yields predictable results across device reloads.
Creating a Port Channel You can create up to 128 port channels with up to 16 port members per group on the platform. To configure a port channel, use the following commands. 1 Create a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2 Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown After you enable the port channel, you can place it in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode.
show config Examples of the show interfaces port-channel Commands To view the port channel’s status and channel members in a tabular format, use the show interfaces port-channel brief command in EXEC Privilege mode, as shown in the following example.
% Error: Port is part of a LAG Te 1/6. Dell(conf-if)# Reassigning an Interface to a New Port Channel An interface can be a member of only one port channel. If the interface is a member of a port channel, remove it from the first port channel and then add it to the second port channel. Each time you add or remove a channel member from a port channel, Dell Networking OS recalculates the hash algorithm for the port channel. To reassign an interface to a new port channel, use the following commands.
Example of Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel Dell#config t Dell(conf)#int po 1 Dell(conf-if-po-1)#minimum-links 5 Dell(conf-if-po-1)# Adding or Removing a Port Channel from a VLAN As with other interfaces, you can add Layer 2 port channel interfaces to VLANs. To add a port channel to a VLAN, place the port channel in Layer 2 mode (by using the switchport command). To add or remove a VLAN port channel and to view VLAN port channel members, use the following commands.
EXEC mode Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# vlan tagged 2-5,100,4010 Dell#show interfaces switchport te 1/1 Codes: U x G i - Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Trunk, H - VSN tagged Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged Name: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 802.
Dell Networking OS allows you to modify the hashing algorithms used for flows and for fragments. The load-balance and hash-algorithm commands are available for modifying the distribution algorithms. Changing the Hash Algorithm The load-balance command selects the hash criteria applied to port channels. If you do not obtain even distribution with the load-balance command, you can use the hash-algorithm command to select the hash scheme for LAG, ECMP and NH-ECMP.
Bulk Configuration Bulk configuration allows you to determine if interfaces are present for physical interfaces or configured for logical interfaces. Interface Range An interface range is a set of interfaces to which other commands may be applied and may be created if there is at least one valid interface within the range. Bulk configuration excludes from configuration any non-existing interfaces from an interface range.
Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range. Example of the interface range Command (Single Range) Dell(config)# interface range tengigabitethernet 1/1 - 23 Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1-23)# no shutdown Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1-23)# Create a Multiple-Range The following is an example of multiple range.
Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range. Example of Adding VLAN and Port-Channel Interface Ranges Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1-2)# interface range Vlan 2 – 100 , Port 1 – 25 Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1-2-vl-2-100-po-1-25)# no shutdown Defining Interface Range Macros You can define an interface-range macro to automatically select a range of interfaces for configuration.
Example of the monitor interface Command The information displays in a continuous run, refreshing every 2 seconds by default. To manage the output, use the following keys. • m — Change mode • l — Page up • T — Increase refresh interval (by 1 second) • t — Decrease refresh interval (by 1 second) • c — Clear screen • a — Page down • q — Quit Dell#monitor interface Te 3/1 Dell uptime is 1 day(s), 4 hour(s), 31 minute(s) Monitor time: 00:00:00 Refresh Intvl.
To test and display TDR results, use the following commands. 1 To test for cable faults on the TenGigabitEthernet cable. EXEC Privilege mode tdr-cable-test tengigabitethernet slot/port Between two ports, do not start the test on both ends of the cable. Enable the interface before starting the test. Enable the port to run the test or the test prints an error message. 2 Displays TDR test results.
Important Points to Remember • Link dampening is not supported on VLAN interfaces. • Link dampening is disabled when the interface is configured for port monitoring. • You can apply link dampening to Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces. • You can configure link dampening on individual interfaces in a LAG. Enabling Link Dampening To enable link dampening, use the following command. • Enable link dampening.
Example of the clear dampening Command Dell# clear dampening interface Te 1/1 Dell#show interfaces dampening Tengigabitethernet 1/1 Interface Supp Flaps Penalty Half-Life Reuse State Te 1/1 Up 0 0 1 2 Dell# Suppress Max-Sup 3 4 Link Dampening Support for XML View the output of the following show commands in XML by adding | display xml to the end of the command.
link-bundle-monitor enable Dell(conf-if-po-10)#link-bundle-monitor enable • Configure threshold level for link bundle monitoring. link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold Dell(conf)#link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold • View the link bundle monitoring status. show link-bundle-distribution Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Ethernet pause frames and threshold settings are supported on the Dell Networking OS. Ethernet Pause Frames allow for a temporary stop in data transmission.
Enabling Pause Frames Enable Ethernet pause frames flow control on all ports on a chassis or a line card. If not, the system may exhibit unpredictable behavior. NOTE: Changes in the flow-control values may not be reflected automatically in the show interface output. As a workaround, apply the new settings, execute shut then no shut on the interface, and then check the running-config of the port. NOTE: If you disable rx flow control, Dell Networking recommends rebooting the system.
For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU. VLANs: • • • All members of a VLAN must have the same IP MTU value. Members can have different Link MTU values. Tagged members must have a link MTU 4–bytes higher than untagged members to account for the packet tag. The VLAN link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the VLAN members.
5 Set the local port speed. INTERFACE mode speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | 10000 | auto} NOTE: If you use an active optical cable (AOC), you can convert the QSFP+ port to a 10 Gigabit SFP+ port or 1 Gigabit SFP port. You can use the speed command to enable the required speed. 6 Optionally, set full- or half-duplex. INTERFACE mode duplex {half | full} 7 Disable auto-negotiation on the port. INTERFACE mode no negotiation auto If the speed was set to 1000, do not disable auto-negotiation.
Set Auto-Negotiation Options The negotiation auto command provides a mode option for configuring an individual port to forced master/ forced slave once autonegotiation is enabled. CAUTION: Ensure that only one end of the node is configured as forced-master and the other is configured as forced-slave. If both are configured the same (that is, both as forced-master or both as forced-slave), the show interface command flaps between an auto-neg-error and forced-master/slave states.
Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show Dell#show ip interface configured ip interface stack-unit 1 configured ip interface tengigabitEthernet 1 configured ip interface br configured ip interface br stack-unit 1 configured ip interface br tengigabitEthernet 1 configured running-config interfaces configured running-config interface tengigabitEthernet 1 configured In EXEC mode, the show interfaces switchport command displays only interfaces in Layer 2 mode and their relevant co
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 1d23h45m Queueing strategy: fifo 0 packets input, 0 bytes Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns Output 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate
3106 packets, 226755 bytes, 0 underruns 133 64-byte pkts, 2973 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 406 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 2700 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 150 seconds): Input 300.00 Mbits/sec, 1534517 packets/sec, 30.00% of line-rate Output 100.00 Mbits/sec, 4636111 packets/sec, 10.
• L2 ACL • L2 FIB Clearing Interface Counters The counters in the show interfaces command are reset by the clear counters command. This command does not clear the counters any SNMP program captures. To clear the counters, use the following the command. • Clear the counters used in the show interface commands for all VRRP groups, VLANs, and physical interfaces or selected ones. Without an interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.
Table 41. Standard and Compressed Configurations int vlan 2 int vlan 3 int vlan 4 int vlan 5 int vlan 100 int vlan 1000 no ip address tagged te 1/1 tagged te 1/1 tagged te 1/1 no ip address ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shut no ip address no ip address no ip address no shut no shut shut shut shut int te 1/1 int te 1/2 int te 1/3 int te 1/4 int te 1/10 int te 1/34 no ip address no ip address no ip address no ip address no ip address ip address 2.1.1.
! shutdown interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/34 ! ip address 2.1.1.1/16 interface Vlan 1000 shutdown ip address 1.1.1.1/16 ! no shutdown interface Vlan 2 ! no ip address no shutdown Compressed config size – 27 lines. ! interface Vlan 3 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 4 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 5 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.
The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode. In stacking scenario, it will also take care of syncing it to all the standby and member units.
22 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for protecting IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a communication session. Use IPSec between hosts, between gateways, or between hosts and gateways. IPSec is compatible with Telnet and FTP protocols. It supports two operational modes: Transport and Tunnel. • Transport mode — (default) Use to encrypt only the payload of the packet. Routing information is unchanged.
crypto ipsec policy myCryptoPolicy 10 ipsec-manual transform-set myXform-set session-key inbound esp 256 auth encrypt session-key outbound esp 257 auth encrypt match 0 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 23 match 1 tcp a::1 /128 23 a::2 /128 0 match 2 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 21 match 3 tcp a::1 /128 21 a::2 /128 0 match 4 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 23 match 5 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 23 1.1.1.2 /32 0 match 6 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 21 match 7 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 21 1.1.1.
23 IPv4 Routing The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell Networking OS.
• Configuring a Broadcast Address • Configurations Using UDP Helper • UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses • UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses • Troubleshooting UDP Helper IP Addresses Dell Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks.
2 • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3 Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface.
• tag tag-value: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. (optional) Example of the show ip route static Command To view the configured routes, use the show ip route static command. Dell#show ip route static Destination Gateway ----------------S 2.1.2.0/24 Direct, Nu 0 S 6.1.2.0/24 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.2/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.3/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.4/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.5/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.6/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.7/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.8/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.9/32 via 6.1.20.
IPv4 Path MTU Discovery Overview The size of the packet that can be sent across each hop in the network path without being fragmented is called the path maximum transmission unit (PMTU). This value might vary for the same route between two devices, mainly over a public network, depending on the network load and speed, and it is not a consistent value. The MTU size can also be different for various types of traffic sent from one host to the same endpoint.
Configuring the Duration to Establish a TCP Connection You can configure the duration for which the device must wait before it attempts to establish a TCP connection. Using this capability, you can limit the wait times for TCP connection requests.
The following sections describe DNS and the resolution of host names. • Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names • Specifying the Local System Domain and a List of Domains • Configuring DNS with Traceroute Name server, Domain name, and Domain list are VRF specific. The maximum number of Name servers and Domain lists per VRF is six. Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names By default, dynamic resolution of host names (DNS) is disabled. To enable DNS, use the following commands.
ip domain-list name Configure this command up to six times to specify a list of possible domain names. Dell Networking OS searches the domain names in the order they were configured until a match is found or the list is exhausted. Configuring DNS with Traceroute To configure your switch to perform DNS with traceroute, use the following commands. • Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-lookup • Specify up to six name servers.
For more information about Proxy ARP, refer to RFC 925, Multi-LAN Address Resolution, and RFC 1027, Using ARP to Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways. Configuration Tasks for ARP For a complete listing of all ARP-related commands, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Clearing ARP Cache To clear the ARP cache of dynamically learnt ARP information, use the following command. • Clear the ARP caches for all interfaces or for a specific interface by entering the following information. EXEC privilege clear arp-cache [interface | ip ip-address] [no-refresh] • ip ip-address (OPTIONAL): enter the keyword ip then the IP address of the ARP entry you wish to clear. • no-refresh (OPTIONAL): enter the keywords no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM.
Figure 49. ARP Learning via ARP Request Beginning with Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0, when you enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system installs a new ARP entry, or updates an existing entry for all received ARP requests. Figure 50. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP.
CONFIGURATION mode arp backoff-time The default is 30. • The range is from 1 to 3600. Display all ARP entries learned via gratuitous ARP. EXEC Privilege mode show arp retries ICMP For diagnostics, the internet control message protocol (ICMP) provides routing information to end stations by choosing the best route (ICMP redirect messages) or determining if a router is reachable (ICMP Echo or Echo Reply). ICMP error messages inform the router of problems in a particular packet.
Important Points to Remember • The existing ip directed broadcast command is rendered meaningless if you enable UDP helper on the same interface. • The broadcast traffic rate should not exceed 200 packets per second when you enable UDP helper. • You may specify a maximum of 16 UDP ports.
Internet address is 1.1.0.1/24 IP UDP-Broadcast address is 1.1.255.
Figure 51. UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses When the destination IP address of an incoming packet matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the system changes the address to the configured broadcast address and sends it to matching interface. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has the destination IP address 1.1.1.255, which matches the subnet broadcast address of VLAN 101.
Figure 53. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. • If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. • If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
24 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
Extended Address Space The address format is extended from 32 bits to 128 bits. This not only provides room for all anticipated needs, it allows for the use of a hierarchical address space structure to optimize global addressing. Stateless Autoconfiguration When a booting device comes up in IPv6 and asks for its network prefix, the device can get the prefix (or prefixes) from an IPv6 router on its link.
• Flow Label (20 bits) • Payload Length (16 bits) • Next Header (8 bits) • Hop Limit (8 bits) • Source Address (128 bits) • Destination Address (128 bits) IPv6 provides for extension headers. Extension headers are used only if necessary. There can be no extension headers, one extension header or more than one extension header in an IPv6 packet. Extension headers are defined in the Next Header field of the preceding IPv6 header.
Next Header (8 bits) The Next Header field identifies the next header’s type. If an Extension header is used, this field contains the type of Extension header (as shown in the following table). If the next header is a transmission control protocol (TCP) or user datagram protocol (UDP) header, the value in this field is the same as for IPv4. The Extension header is located between the IP header and the TCP or UDP header. The following lists the Next Header field values.
Source Address (128 bits) The Source Address field contains the IPv6 address for the packet originator. Destination Address (128 bits) The Destination Address field contains the intended recipient’s IPv6 address. This can be either the ultimate destination or the address of the next hop router. Extension Header Fields Extension headers are used only when necessary. Due to the streamlined nature of the IPv6 header, adding extension headers do not severely impact performance.
10 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address identifying the unknown option type. 11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination.
the same IPv6 address to a particular computer, and never to assign that IP address to another computer. This allows static IPv6 addresses to be configured in one place, without having to specifically configure each computer on the network in a different way. In IPv6, every interface, whether using static or dynamic address assignments, also receives a local-link address automatically in the fe80::/64 subnet.
Feature and Functionality Dell Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location S4820T IS-IS for IPv6 support for redistribution 8.3.19 Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. ISIS for IPv6 support for distribute lists and administrative distance 8.3.19 OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 9.1(0.0) Equal Cost Multipath for IPv6 8.3.
• Error reporting messages indicate when the forwarding or delivery of the packet failed at the destination or intermediate node. These messages include Destination Unreachable, Packet Too Big, Time Exceeded and Parameter Problem messages. • Informational messages provide diagnostic functions and additional host functions, such as Neighbor Discovery and Multicast Listener Discovery. These messages also include Echo Request and Echo Reply messages.
With ARP, each node broadcasts ARP requests on the entire link. This approach causes unnecessary processing by uninterested nodes. With NDP, each node sends a request only to the intended destination via a multicast address with the unicast address used as the last 24 bits. Other hosts on the link do not participate in the process, greatly increasing network bandwidth efficiency. Figure 56.
The DNS server address does not allow the following: • link local addresses • loopback addresses • prefix addresses • multicast addresses • invalid host addresses If you specify this information in the IPv6 RDNSS configuration, a DNS error is displayed. Example for Configuring an IPv6 Recursive DNS Server The following example configures a RDNNS server with an IPv6 address of 1000::1 and a lifetime of 1 second.
Displaying IPv6 RDNSS Information To display IPv6 interface information, including IPv6 RDNSS information, use the show ipv6 interface command in EXEC or EXEC Privilege mode. Examples of Displaying IPv6 RDNSS Information The following example displays IPv6 RDNSS information. The output in the last 3 lines indicates that the IPv6 RDNSS was correctly configured on interface te 1/1.
Configuration Tasks for IPv6 The following are configuration tasks for the IPv6 protocol. • Adjusting Your CAM-Profile • Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface • Assigning a Static IPv6 Route • Configuring Telnet with IPv6 • SNMP over IPv6 • Showing IPv6 Information • Clearing IPv6 Routes Adjusting Your CAM-Profile Although adjusting your CAM-profile is not a mandatory step, if you plan to implement IPv6 ACLs, adjust your CAM settings. The CAM space is allotted in FP blocks.
The total number of groups is 4. Assigning an IPv6 Address to an Interface Essentially, IPv6 is enabled in Dell Networking OS simply by assigning IPv6 addresses to individual router interfaces. You can use IPv6 and IPv4 together on a system, but be sure to differentiate that usage carefully. To assign an IPv6 address to an interface, use the ipv6 address command.
Configuring Telnet with IPv6 The Telnet client and server in Dell Networking OS supports IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router using an IPv6 Telnet client, or you can initiate an IPv6 Telnet connection from the router. NOTE: Telnet to link local addresses is supported on the system. • Enter the IPv6 Address for the device. EXEC mode or EXEC Privileged mode telnet [vrf vrf-name] ipv6 address • ipv6 address: x:x:x:x::x • mask: prefix length is from 0 to 128.
prefix-list route rpf Dell# List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface. EXEC mode show ipv6 interface interface {slot/port} Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: • For all brief summary of IPv6 status and configuration, enter the keyword brief.
show ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] type The following keywords are available: • To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). • To display information about a host, enter hostname. • To display information about all IPv6 routes (including non-active routes), enter all. • To display information about all connected IPv6 routes, enter connected. • To display information about brief summary of all IPv6 routes, enter summary.
Showing the Running-Configuration for an Interface To view the configuration for any interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface. EXEC mode show running-config interface type {slot/port} Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
INTERFACE no ipv6 nd disable-reachable-timer The following example shows how to disable the ND timer. Dell(conf-if-fo-1/1/1)#ipv6 nd disable-reachable-timer Configuring IPv6 RA Guard The IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard allows you to block or reject the unwanted router advertisement guard messages that arrive at the network device platform. To configure the IPv6 RA guard, perform the following steps: 1 Configure the terminal to enter the Global Configuration mode.
router-preference maximum {high | low | medium} 10 Set the router lifetime. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode router—lifetime value The router lifetime range is from 0 to 9,000 seconds. 11 Apply the policy to trusted ports. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode trusted-port 12 Set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) value. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode mtu value 13 Set the advertised reachability time.
INTERFACE mode ipv6 nd ra-guard attach policy policy-name [vlan [vlan 1, vland 2, vlan 3.....]] 3 Display the configurations applied on all the RA guard policies or a specific RA guard policy. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name The policy name string can be up to 140 characters.
25 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
• iSCSI QoS — A user-configured iSCSI class of service (CoS) profile is applied to all iSCSI traffic. Classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given preferential QoS treatment over other data passing through the switch. Preferential treatment helps to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause dropped iSCSI packets. • iSCSI DCBx TLVs are supported.
Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows The switch snoops iSCSI session-establishment and termination packets by installing classifier rules that trap iSCSI protocol packets to the CPU for examination. Devices that initiate iSCSI sessions usually use well-known TCP ports 3260 or 860 to contact targets. When you enable iSCSI optimization, by default the switch identifies IP packets to or from these ports as iSCSI traffic.
If more than 256 simultaneous sessions are logged continuously, the following message displays indicating the queue rate limit has been reached: %STKUNIT2-M:CP %iSCSI-5-ISCSI_OPT_MAX_SESS_EXCEEDED: New iSCSI Session Ignored: ISID 400001370000 InitiatorName - iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:dt-brcd-cna-2 TargetName iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:4-52aed6-b90d9446c-162466364804fa49-wj-v1 TSIH - 0" NOTE: If you are using EqualLogic or Compellent storage arrays, more than 256 simultaneous iSCSI sessions are possible.
including jumbo frames and flow-control on all ports; no storm control and spanning-tree port fast to be enabled on the port of detection. After you execute the iscsi profile-compellent command, the following actions occur: • Jumbo frame size is set to the maximum for all interfaces on all ports and port-channels, if it is not already enabled. • Spanning-tree portfast is enabled on the interface. • Unicast storm control is disabled on the interface.
NOTE: By default, CAM allocation for iSCSI is set to 0. This disables session monitoring. Default iSCSI Optimization Values The following table lists the default values for the iSCSI optimization feature. Table 43. iSCSI Optimization Defaults Parameter Default Value iSCSI Optimization global setting Disabled on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, and S3100 series. iSCSI CoS mode (802.1p priority queue mapping) dot1p priority 4 without the remark setting when you enable iSCSI.
NOTE: Content addressable memory (CAM) allocation is optional. If CAM is not allocated, the following features are disabled: • session monitoring • aging • class of service You can enable iSCSI even when allocated with zero (0) CAM blocks. However, if no CAM blocks are allocated, session monitoring is disabled and this information the show iscsi command displays this information. 2 For a non-DCB environment: Enable iSCSI.
[no] iscsi cos {enable | disable | dot1p vlan-priority-value [remark] | dscp dscp-value [remark]} • enable: enables the application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI traffic so that iSCSI packets are scheduled in the switch with a dot1p priority 4 regardless of the VLAN priority tag in the packet. The default is: iSCSI packets are handled with dotp1 priority 4 without remark. • disable: disables the application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI frames.
show run iscsi Examples of the show iscsi Commands The following example shows the show iscsi command. Dell#show iscsi iSCSI is enabled iSCSI session monitoring is disabled iSCSI COS : dot1p is 4 no-remark Session aging time: 10 Maximum number of connections is 256 -----------------------------------------------iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports: -----------------------------------------------TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 The following example shows the show iscsi session command.
26 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
• area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI). • system address — the router’s MAC address. • N-selector — this is always 0. The following illustration is an example of the ISO-style address to show the address format IS-IS uses. In this example, the first five bytes (47.0005.0001) are the area address. The system portion is 000c.000a.4321 and the last byte is always 0. Figure 58.
Interface Support MT IS-IS is supported on physical Ethernet interfaces, physical synchronous optical network technologies (SONET) interfaces, portchannel interfaces (static and dynamic using LACP), and virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. Adjacencies Adjacencies on point-to-point interfaces are formed as usual, where IS-IS routers do not implement MT extensions.
IPv6 Reachability and IPv6 Interface Address. Also, a new IPv6 protocol identifier has also been included in the supported TLVs. The new TLVs use the extended metrics and up/down bit semantics. Multi-topology IS-IS adds TLVs: • MT TLV — contains one or more Multi-Topology IDs in which the router participates. This TLV is included in IIH and the first fragment of an LSP. • MT Intermediate Systems TLV — appears for every topology a node supports.
Configuration Tasks for IS-IS The following describes the configuration tasks for IS-IS. • Enabling IS-IS • Configure Multi-Topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) • Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart • Changing LSP Attributes • Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style • Configuring IS-IS Cost • Changing the IS-Type • Controlling Routing Updates • Configuring Authentication Passwords • Setting the Overload Bit • Debuging IS-IS Enabling IS-IS By default, IS-IS is not enabled.
4 • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enter an IPv4 Address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask Assign an IP address and mask to the interface.
Accept wide metrics: Dell# none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
4 Implement a wide metric-style globally. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215. Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart To enable IS-IS graceful restart globally, use the following commands. Additionally, you can implement optional commands to enable the graceful restart settings. • Enable graceful restart on ISIS processes.
• adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. • manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Examples of the show isis graceful-restart detail Command NOTE: If this timer expires before the synchronization has completed, the restarting router sends the overload bit in the LSP.
LSP Interval: 33 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 Dell# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary.
Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style All IS-IS links or interfaces are associated with a cost that is used in the shortest path first (SPF) calculations. The possible cost varies depending on the metric style supported. If you configure narrow, transition, or narrow transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 63. If you configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 16,777,215.
Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none Configuring the IS-IS Cost When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value could be affected. For each interface with IS-IS enabled, you can assign a cost or metric that is used in the link state calculation. To change the metric or cost of the interface, use the following commands. • Assign an IS-IS metric.
Changing the IS-Type To change the IS-type, use the following commands. You can configure the system to act as a Level 1 router, a Level 1-2 router, or a Level 2 router. To change the IS-type for the router, use the following commands. • Configure IS-IS operating level for a router. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} • Default is level-1-2. Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process.
• For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or Dell Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table. The prefix lists are globally applied on all interfaces running IS-IS.
• Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes. ROUTER ISIS-AF IPV6 mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] Enter the type of interface and the interface information: • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
ROUTER ISIS mode redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric value] [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: • process-id the range is from 1 to 65535. • level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. • metric value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. • match external the range is from 1 or 2.
Configuring Authentication Passwords You can assign an authentication password for routers in Level 1 and for routers in Level 2. Because Level 1 and Level 2 routers do not communicate with each other, you can assign different passwords for Level 1 routers and for Level 2 routers. However, if you want the routers in the level to communicate with each other, configure them with the same password. To configure a simple text password, use the following commands.
eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000A 0xF963 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.00-00 0x00000002 0xD1A7 IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000006 0xC38A eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000E 0x53BF eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
To disable a specific debug command, enter the keyword no then the debug command. For example, to disable debugging of IS-IS updates, use the no debug isis updates-packets command. To disable all IS-IS debugging, use the no debug isis command. To disable all debugging, use the undebug all command. IS-IS Metric Styles The following sections provide additional information about the IS-IS metric styles.
Table 46. Metric Value When the Metric Style Changes Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value wide narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only). The original isis metric value is displayed in the show config and show running-config commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style.
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value commands and is used if you change back to transition metric style. Moving to transition and then to another metric style produces different results. Table 47.
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition narrow truncated value wide transition narrow transition truncated value wide transition transition truncated value Sample Configurations The following configurations are examples for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations.
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. Dell(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.1/24 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ip router isis ipv6 router isis no shutdown Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)# Dell (conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis metric-style wide level-1 metric-style wide level-2 net 34.0000.
27 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
LACP Modes Dell Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. • Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. • Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
The default is 32768. LACP Configuration Tasks The following configuration tasks apply to LACP. • Creating a LAG • Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic • Setting the LACP Long Timeout • Monitoring and Debugging LACP • Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. • Create a dynamic port channel (LAG).
Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitethernet 4/15 Dell(conf-if-te-4/15)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-4/15)#port-channel-protocol lacp Dell(conf-if-te-4/15-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
• Debug LACP, including configuration and events. EXEC mode [no] debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface [in | out]]]] Shared LAG State Tracking Shared LAG state tracking provides the flexibility to bring down a port channel (LAG) based on the operational state of another LAG. At any time, only two LAGs can be a part of a group such that the fate (status) of one LAG depends on the other LAG.
Example of LAGs in the Same Failover Group Dell#config Dell(conf)#port-channel failover-group Dell(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 To view the failover group configuration, use the show running-configuration po-failover-group command. Dell#show running-config po-failover-group ! port-channel failover-group group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 As shown in the following illustration, LAGs 1 and 2 are members of a failover group.
Important Points about Shared LAG State Tracking The following is more information about shared LAG state tracking. • • • • • This feature is available for static and dynamic LAGs. Only a LAG can be a member of a failover group. You can configure shared LAG state tracking on one side of a link or on both sides. If a LAG that is part of a failover group is deleted, the failover group is deleted. If a LAG moves to the Down state due to this feature, its members may still be in the Up state.
Port is part of Port-channel 10 Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Current address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Interface Index is 109101113 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Slave Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:02:11 Queueing strategy: fifo Input statistics: 132 packets, 163668 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts,
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Summary of the LAG Configuration on Bravo Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#int port-channel 10 Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no ip add Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Figure 68. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
28 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table. • Clearing the MAC Address Table • Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries • Configuring a Static MAC Address • Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command.
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
In this case, the configuration is still present in the running-config and show output. Remove the configuration before re-applying a MAC learning limit with a lower value. Also, ensure that you can view the Syslog messages on your session. NOTE: The CAM-check failure message beginning in Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 is different from versions 8.2.1.
When you enable sticky mac on an interface, dynamically-learned MAC addresses do not age, even if you enabled mac-learninglimit dynamic. If you configured mac-learning-limit and mac-learning-limit dynamic and you disabled sticky MAC, any dynamically-learned MAC addresses ages. mac learning-limit station-move The mac learning-limit station-move command allows a MAC address already in the table to be learned from another interface.
Setting Station Move Violation Actions no-station-move is the default behavior. You can configure the system to take an action if a station move occurs using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command. To display a list of interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation actions, use the following commands. • Generate a system log message indicating a station move. INTERFACE mode station-move-violation log • Shut down the first port to learn the MAC address.
Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System You can configure the system to not learn MAC addresses from LACP and LLDP BPDUs. To disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs, follow this procedure: • Disable source MAC address learning from LACP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode • mac-address-table disable-learning lacp Disable source MAC address learning from LLDP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode • mac-address-table disable-learning lldp Disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs.
NOTE: If you have configured the no mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp command, traffic continues to be forwarded to the failed NIC until the ARP entry on the switch times out. Figure 70.
Figure 71. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
Important Points about Configuring Redundant Pairs • • • • You may not configure any interface to be a backup for more than one interface, no interface can have more than one backup, and a backup interface may not have a backup interface. The active or backup interface may not be a member of a LAG. The active and standby do not have to be of the same type (1G, 10G, and so on). You may not enable any Layer 2 protocol on any interface of a redundant pair or to ports connected to them.
Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_ACT_STBY: Changed interface state to standby: Po 2 Dell(conf-if-po-1)# Dell# Dell#show interfaces switchport backup Interface Status Paired Interface Status Port-channel 1 Active Port-chato mannel 2 Standby Port-channel 2 Standby Port-channel 1 Active Dell# Dell(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface tengigabitethernet 1/2 Apr 9 00:16:29: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WA
FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive. When you enable Normal mode on an interface and a far-end failure is detected, no intervention is required to reset the interface to bring it back to an FEFD operational state. When you enable Aggressive mode on an interface in the same state, manual intervention is required to reset the interface.
Configuring FEFD You can configure FEFD for all interfaces from CONFIGURATION mode, or on individual interfaces from INTERFACE mode. To enable FEFD globally on all interfaces, use the following command. • Enable FEFD globally on all interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode fefd-global To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
fefd [mode {aggressive | normal}] • Disable FEFD protocol on one interface. INTERFACE mode fefd disable Disabling an interface shuts down all protocols working on that interface’s connected line. It does not delete your previous FEFD configuration which you can enable again at any time. To set up and activate two or more connected interfaces, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-INACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to inactive: Vl 1 2w1d22h : FEFD state on Te 4/1 changed from Bi-directional to Unknown Dell#debug fefd packets Dell#2w1d22h : FEFD packet sent via interface Te 1/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Te 1/1) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Te 4/1) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) 2w1d22h : FEFD packet received on interface Te 4/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info
29 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices.
Table 50. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Types Type TLV Description 0 End of LLDPDU Marks the end of an LLDPDU. 1 Chassis ID An administratively assigned name that identifies the LLDP agent. 2 Port ID An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received. 3 Time to Live An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received.
Figure 75. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 51. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
Type TLV Description LLDP, but is available and mandatory (nonconfigurable) in the LLDP-MED implementation. 127 Power via MDI Dell Networking supports the LLDP-MED protocol, which recommends that Power via MDI TLV be not implemented, and therefore Dell Networking implements Extended Power via MDI TLV only. 127 Link Aggregation Indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated, whether it is currently in a LAG, and the port identification of the LAG.
Type SubType TLV Description • • • whether the transmitting device supports LLDP-MED what LLDP-MED TLVs it supports LLDP device class 127 2 Network Policy Indicates the application type, VLAN ID, Layer 2 Priority, and DSCP value. 127 3 Location Identification Indicates that the physical location of the device expressed in one of three possible formats: • • • 127 4 Inventory Management TLVs Implementation of this set of TLVs is optional in LLDP-MED devices. None or all TLVs must be supported.
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV. • The value of the LLDP-MED capabilities field in the TLV is a 2–octet bitmap, each bit represents an LLDP-MED capability (as shown in the following table). • The possible values of the LLDP-MED device type are shown in the following.
• VLAN ID • VLAN tagged or untagged status • Layer 2 priority • DSCP value An integer represents the application type (the Type integer shown in the following table), which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined. An individual LLDP-MED network policy TLV is generated for each application type that you specify with the Dell Networking OS CLI (Advertising TLVs).
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. • Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
LLDP Compatibility • Spanning tree and force10 ring protocol “blocked” ports allow LLDPDUs. • 802.1X controlled ports do not allow LLDPDUs until the connected device is authenticated. CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode, which is a sub-mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode. • Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global; that is, they affect all interfaces on the system.
Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. • Disable LLDP globally or for an interface. disable To undo an LLDP configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Advertising TLVs You can configure the system to advertise TLVs out of all interfaces or out of specific interfaces. • If you configure the system globally, all interfaces send LLDPDUs with the specified TLVs.
Figure 79. Configuring LLDP Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration, use the following command. • Display the LLDP configuration. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode show config Examples of Viewing LLDP Configurations The following example shows viewing an LLDP global configuration.
• Display brief information about adjacent devices. show lldp neighbors • Display all of the information that neighbors are advertising.
Example of Viewing LLDPDU Intervals R1(conf)#protocol lldp R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#mode ? rx Rx only tx Tx only R1(conf-lldp)#mode tx R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-d
protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description mode tx no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no mode R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring the Time to Live Value The information received from a neighbor expires
• View a readable version of the TLVs. debug lldp brief • View a readable version of the TLVs plus a hexadecimal version of the entire LLDPDU. debug lldp detail To stop viewing the LLDP TLVs sent and received by the system, use the no debug lldp command. Figure 80. The debug lldp detail Command — LLDPDU Packet Dissection Relevant Management Objects Dell Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects.
Table 56. LLDP Configuration MIB Objects MIB Object Category LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description LLDP Configuration adminStatus lldpPortConfigAdminStatus Whether you enable the local LLDP agent for transmit, receive, or both. msgTxHold lldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier Multiplier value. msgTxInterval lldpMessageTxInterval Transmit Interval value. rxInfoTTL lldpRxInfoTTL Time to live for received TLVs. txInfoTTL lldpTxInfoTTL Time to live for transmitted TLVs.
TLV Type 4 TLV Name Port Description 5 System Name 6 System Description 7 System Capabilities 8 Management Address TLV Variable port description system name system description system capabilities enabled capabilities management address length management address subtype management address interface numbering subtype interface number OID System LLDP MIB Object Remote lldpRemPortId Local lldpLocPortDesc Remote lldpRemPortDesc Local lldpLocSysName Remote lldpRemSysName Local
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable PPVID 127 VLAN Name VID VLAN name length VLAN name System LLDP MIB Object Remote lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanEna bled Local lldpXdot1LocProtoVlanId Remote lldpXdot1RemProtoVlanId Local lldpXdot1LocVlanId Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanId Local lldpXdot1LocVlanName Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanName Local lldpXdot1LocVlanName Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanName Table 59.
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object L2 Priority Local lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyPri ority Remote lldpXMedRemMediaPolicyP riority Local lldpXMedLocMediaPolicyDs cp Remote lldpXMedRemMediaPolicyD scp Local lldpXMedLocLocationSubty pe Remote lldpXMedRemLocationSubt ype Local lldpXMedLocLocationInfo Remote lldpXMedRemLocationInfo Local lldpXMedLocXPoEDeviceTy pe Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEDeviceT ype Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPow erSource DSCP Value 3 Location Identi
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erReq Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 537
30 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
With Multicast NLB mode, the data forwards to all the servers based on the port specified using the following Layer 2 multicast command in CONFIGURATION MODE: mac-address-table static multicast vlan output-range , Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: • The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN.
• Enter the ip vlan-flooding command to specify that all Layer 3 unicast routed data traffic going through a VLAN member port floods across all the member ports of that VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip vlan-flooding There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries.
31 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected. Figure 82.
With Anycast RP, all the RPs are configured to be MSDP peers of each other. When a source registers with one RP, an SA message is sent to the other RPs informing them that there is an active source for a particular multicast group. The result is that each RP is aware of the active sources in the area of the other RPs. If any of the RPs fail, IP routing converges and one of the RPs becomes the active RP in more than one area. New sources register with the backup RP.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1 Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2 Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source Examples of Configuring and Viewing MSDP R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
R3(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Description Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
show ip msdp sa-limit If the total number of active sources is already larger than the limit when limiting is applied, the sources that are already in Dell Networking OS are not discarded. To enforce the limit in such a situation, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache command to clear all existing entries. Clearing the Source-Active Cache To clear the source-active cache, use the following command. • Clear the SA cache of all, local, or rejected entries, or entries for a specific group.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
Figure 89. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
GroupAddr 229.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 229.0.50.4 SourceAddr 24.0.50.2 24.0.50.3 24.0.50.4 RPAddr 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 Expire 73 73 73 UpTime 00:13:49 00:13:49 00:13:49 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.
R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 1 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 00:02:20 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local Reason Redistribute Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1 OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache.
Example of Verifying the System is not Advertising Local Sources In the following example, R1 stops advertising source 10.11.4.2. Because it is already in the SA cache of R3, the entry remains there until it expires. [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.3 list mylocalfilter R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended mylocalfilter seq 5 deny ip host 239.0.0.1 host 10.11.4.
Output (S,G) filter: none [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.3 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:03 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Clearing Peer Statistics To clear the peer statistics, use the following command. • Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all peer statistics.
03:17:10 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, 03:17:27 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, Input (S,G) filter: none Output (S,G) filter: none rcvd Keepalive msg sent Source Active msg MSDP with Anycast RP Anycast RP uses MSDP with PIM-SM to allow more than one active group to use RP mapping.
Figure 90. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1 In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2 Make this address the RP for the group.
4 Peer each RP with every other RP using MSDP, specifying the unique Loopback address as the connect-source. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer 5 Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP.
interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.11/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.11/32 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.
The following example shows an R3 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.32/24 no shutdown interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/41 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.1/32 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.
ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.80.3/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.
32 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally • Adding and Removing Interfaces • Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances • Influencing MSTP Root Selection • Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges • Changing the Region Name or Revision • Modifying Global Parameters • Modifying the Interface Parameters • Configuring an EdgePort • Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change • MSTP Sample Configurations • Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell Networking O
Related Configuration Tasks The following are the related configuration tasks for MSTP.
• spanning-tree 0 To remove an interface from the MSTP topology, use the no spanning-tree 0 command. Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances To create multiple spanning tree instances, use the following command. A single MSTI provides no more benefit than RSTP. To take full advantage of MSTP, create multiple MSTIs and map VLANs to them. • Create an MSTI. PROTOCOL MSTP mode msti Specify the keyword vlan then the VLANs that you want to participate in the MSTI.
Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.384 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e806.953e Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e809.c24a Designated port id is 128.
Changing the Region Name or Revision To change the region name or revision, use the following commands. • Change the region name. PROTOCOL MSTP mode name name • Change the region revision number. PROTOCOL MSTP mode revision number Example of the name Command To view the current region name and revision, use the show spanning-tree mst configuration command from EXEC Privilege mode.
NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. 3 Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. 4 Change the max-hops parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-hops number The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20.
Port Cost Default Value 25-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1700 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1400 50-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1200 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 200 Port Channel with 100 Mb/s Ethernet interfaces 180000 Port Channel with 1-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 18000 Port Channel with 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1800 Port Channel with 25-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1200 Port Channel with 50-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 200 Port Channel with 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 180
• If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware. • When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. • When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the error disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware).
Figure 92. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown SFTOS Example Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable
interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode • debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages.
Dell# 4w0d4h : MSTP: Sending BPDU on Te 2/21 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x6e CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, CIST Port Id: 128:470 Msg Age: 0, Max Age: 20, Hello: 2, Fwd Delay: 15, Ver1 Len: 0, Ver3 Len: 96 Name: Tahiti, Rev: 123, Int Root Path Cost: 0 Rem Hops: 20, Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e 4w0d4h : INST 1: Flags: 0x6e, Reg Root: 32768:0001.e806.
33 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Protocol Ethernet Address 01:00:5e:00:00:06 RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. Multicast Policies The Dell Networking OS supports multicast features for IPv4.
ip multicast-limit The range is from 1 to 16000. The default is 4000. NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe. Any software-configured limit may supersede this hardware space limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit is reached using the ip multicast-limit command.
Figure 93. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 62. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Preventing a PIM Router from Forming an Adjacency To prevent a router from participating in PIM (for example, to configure stub multicast routing), use the following command. • Prevent a router from participating in PIM. INTERFACE mode ip pim neighbor-filter Preventing a Source from Registering with the RP To prevent the PIM source DR from sending register packets to route processor (RP) for the specified multicast source and group, use the following command.
Figure 94. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 63. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
Important Points to Remember • Destination address of the mtrace query message can be either a unicast or a multicast address. NOTE: When you use mtrace to trace a specific multicast group, the query is sent with the group's address as the destination. Retries of the query use the unicast address of the receiver. • When you issue an mtrace without specifying a group address (weak mtrace), the destination address is considered as the unicast address of the receiver.
• Source Network/Mask — source mask Example of the mtrace Command to View the Network Path The following is an example of tracing a multicast route. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.3 to destination 1.1.1.1 via group 226.0.0.
The response data block filled in by the last-hop router contains a Forwarding code field. Forwarding code can be added at any node and is not restricted to the last hop router. This field is used to record error codes before forwarding the response to the next neighbor in the path towards the source. In a response data packet, the following error codes are supported: Table 65.
Scenario Output -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command specifying the source multicast tree and multicast group without specifying the destination. Mtrace traces the complete path traversing through the multicast group to reach the source. The output displays the destination and the first hop (-1) as 0 to indicate any PIM enabled interface on the node. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Scenario Output 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command by providing the source and multicast information. However, if the multicast group is a shared group (*,G), then mtrace traces the path of the shared tree until it reaches the RP. The source mask field reflects the shared tree that is being used to trace the path.
Scenario Output -3 10.10.10.1 PIM No route default ----------------------------------------------------------------- If a multicast tree is not formed due to a configuration issue (for example, PIM is not enabled on one of the interfaces on the path), you can invoke a weak mtrace to identify the location in the network where the error has originated. R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Scenario Output -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 99.99.0.0/16 -4 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------- If there is no response for mtrace even after switching to expanded hop search, the command displays an error message. R1>mtrace 99.99.99.99 1.1.1.1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
Scenario Output scenario, a corresponding error message is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM Wrong interface 6.6.6.0/24 ----------------------------------------------------------------R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
34 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
Figure 95. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: • UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. • A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes You can create an object that tracks an IPv4 or IPv6 route entry in the routing table. Specify a tracked route by its IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix-length. Optionally specify a tracked route by a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance name if the route to be tracked is part of a VRF. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of the tracked object.
Set Tracking Delays You can configure an optional UP and/or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients. The configured time delay starts when the state changes from UP to DOWN or the opposite way. If the state of an object changes back to its former UP/DOWN state before the timer expires, the timer is cancelled and the client is not notified.
To configure object tracking on the status of a Layer 2 interface, use the following commands. 1 Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id interface interface line-protocol Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535. 2 (Optional) Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked interface. OBJECT TRACKING mode delay {[up seconds] [down seconds]} Valid delay times are from 0 to 180 seconds.
For an IPv6 interface, a routing object only tracks the UP/DOWN status of the specified IPv6 interface (the track interface ipv6routing command). • The status of an IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IPv6 address. • The Layer 3 status of an IPv6 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down (for a Layer 3 VLAN, all VLAN ports must be down) or the IPv6 address is removed from the routing table.
Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7/11 ipv6 routing Description: Austin access point Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks the reachability or metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. You specify the route to be tracked by its address and prefix-length values. Optionally, for an IPv4 route, you can enter a VRF instance name if the route is part of a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) table. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of a tracked IPv4/ IPv6 route.
Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1 Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} reachability [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535.
The following example configures object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route: Dell(conf)#track 105 ipv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Dell(conf-track-105)#delay down 5 Dell(conf-track-105)#description Headquarters Dell(conf-track-105)#end Dell#show track 105 Track 105 IPv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Description: Headquarters Reachability is Down (route not in route table) 2 changes, last change 00:03:03 Tracking a Metric Threshold Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the met
threshold metric {[up number] [down number]} The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. The defult DOWN threshold is 255. The routing state is DOWN if the scaled route metric is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold. 6 (Optional) Display the tracking configuration.
First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 4 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 ip routing IP routing is Up 3 changes, last change 00:03:30 Tracked by: Example of the show track brief Command Router# show track brief ResId State 1 Resource LastChange
35 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 96. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
• A not-so-stubby area (NSSA) can import AS external route information and send it to the backbone. It cannot receive external AS information from the backbone or other areas. • Totally stubby areas are referred to as no summary areas in the Dell Networking OS. Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important.
Figure 97. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) The autonomous system border area router (ASBR) connects to more than one AS and exchanges information with the routers in other ASs. Generally, the ASBR connects to a non-interior gate protocol (IGP) such as BGP or uses static routes.
• Type 7: External LSA — Routers in an NSSA do not receive external LSAs from ABRs, but are allowed to send external routing information for redistribution. They use Type 7 LSAs to tell the ABRs about these external routes, which the ABR then translates to Type 5 external LSAs and floods as normal to the rest of the OSPF network. • Type 8: Link LSA (OSPFv3) — This LSA carries the IPv6 address information of the local links.
Figure 98. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS supports up to 16,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Dell Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF. OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 can co-exist but you must configure them individually.
Graceful Restart Graceful restart for OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 are supported on the S4820T platform in Helper and Restart modes. When a router goes down without a graceful restart, there is a possibility for loss of access to parts of the network due to ongoing network topology changes. Additionally, LSA flooding and reconvergence can cause substantial delays. It is, therefore, desirable that the network maintains a stable topology if it is possible for data flow to continue uninterrupted.
Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only) Fast convergence allows you to define the speeds at which LSAs are originated and accepted, and reduce OSPFv2 end-to-end convergence time. Dell Networking OS allows you to accept and originate LSAs as soon as they are available to speed up route information propagation. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
ACKs 2 (shown in bold) is printed only for ACK packets. The following example shows no change in the updated packets (shown in bold). ACKs 2 (shown in bold) is printed only for ACK packets. 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.2 aid:1500 chk:0xdbee aut:0 auk: keyid:0 from:Vl 1000 LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.1.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.2.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.
Examples of Setting and Viewing a Dead Interval In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold). Dell(conf)#int tengigabitethernet 2/2 Dell(conf-if-te-2/2)#ip ospf hello-interval 20 Dell(conf-if-te-2/2)#ip ospf dead-interval 80 Dell(conf-if-te-2/2)# In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold).
• Troubleshooting OSPFv2 1 Configure a physical interface. Assign an IP address, physical or Loopback, to the interface to enable Layer 3 routing. 2 Enable OSPF globally. Assign network area and neighbors. 3 Add interfaces or configure other attributes. 4 Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation.
The OSPF process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process. The router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system.
If you are using a Loopback interface, refer to Loopback Interfaces. 2 Enable the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPFv2 process globally. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf] The range is from 0 to 65535. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system.
The first bold lines assign an IP address to a Layer 3 interface, and theno shutdown command ensures that the interface is UP. The second bold line assigns the IP address of an interface to an area. Example of Enabling OSPFv2 and Assigning an Area to an Interface Dell#(conf)#int te 4/14 Dell(conf-if-te-4/14)#ip address 10.10.10.10/24 Dell(conf-if-te-4/14)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-4/14)#ex Dell(conf)#router ospf 1 Dell(conf-router_ospf-1)#network 1.2.3.4/24 area 0 Dell(conf-router_ospf-1)#network 10.10.
Adjacent with neighbor 10.168.253.5 (Designated Router) Adjacent with neighbor 10.168.253.3 (Backup Designated Router) Loopback 0 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.168.253.2/32, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 10.168.253.2, Network Type LOOPBACK, Cost: 1 Loopback interface is treated as a stub Host. Dell# Configuring Stub Areas OSPF supports different types of LSAs to help reduce the amount of router processing within the areas.
Enabling Passive Interfaces A passive interface is one that does not send or receive routing information. Enabling passive interface suppresses routing updates on an interface. Although the passive interface does not send or receive routing updates, the network on that interface is still included in OSPF updates sent via other interfaces. To suppress the interface’s participation on an OSPF interface, use the following command. This command stops the router from sending updates on that interface.
Enabling Fast-Convergence The fast-convergence CLI sets the minimum origination and arrival LSA parameters to zero (0), allowing rapid route calculation. When you disable fast-convergence, origination and arrival LSA parameters are set to 5 seconds and 1 second, respectively. Setting the convergence parameter (from 1 to 4) indicates the actual convergence level.
Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces. Some interface parameter values must be consistent across all interfaces to avoid routing errors. For example, set the same time interval for the hello packets on all routers in the OSPF network to prevent misconfiguration of OSPF neighbors. To change OSPFv2 parameters on the interfaces, use any or all of the following commands. • Change the cost associated with OSPF traffic on the interface.
• • seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 5 seconds). The retransmit interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Change the wait period between link state update packets sent out the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf transmit-delay seconds • seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 1 second). The transmit delay must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network.
not take effect immediately after the authentication change wait timer expires; OSPF accepts both the old as well as new authentication schemes for a time period that is equal to two times the configured authentication change wait timer. After this time period, OSPF accepts only the new authentication scheme. This transmission stops when the period ends. The default is 0 seconds. Enabling OSPFv2 Graceful Restart Graceful restart is enabled for the global OSPF process.
To disable OSPFv2 graceful-restart after you have enabled it, use the no graceful-restart grace-period command in CONFIGROUTEROSPF- id mode. The command returns OSPF graceful-restart to its default state. NOTE: The Helper mode is enabled by default on the device. To enable the restart mode also on the device, you must configure the grace period using the graceful-restart grace-period command. After you enable restart mode the router advertises the neighbor as fully adjacent during a restart.
Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPF process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process. NOTE: Do not route iBGP routes to OSPF unless there are route-maps associated with the OSPF redistribution. To redistribute routes, use the following command. • Specify which routes are redistributed into OSPF process.
• show neighbors • show routes To help troubleshoot OSPFv2, use the following commands. • View the summary of all OSPF process IDs enables on the router. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config ospf • View the summary information of the IP routes. EXEC Privilege mode show ip route summary • View the summary information for the OSPF database. EXEC Privilege mode show ip ospf database • View the configuration of OSPF neighbors connected to the local router.
You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. Basic OSPFv2 Router Topology The following illustration is a sample basic OSPFv2 topology. Figure 99. Basic Topology and CLI Commands for OSPFv2 OSPF Area 0 — Te 1/1 and 1/2 router ospf 11111 network 10.0.11.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.12.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.1.11.
no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/2 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.2/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 ip address 10.2.22.
Example Dell#conf Dell(conf)#ipv6 router ospf 1 Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#timer spf 2 5 msec Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#show config ! ipv6 router ospf 1 timers spf 2 5 msec Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#end Dell# Enabling IPv6 Unicast Routing To enable IPv6 unicast routing, use the following command. • Enable IPv6 unicast routing globally.
The format is A:B:C::F/128. 2 Bring up the interface. CONF-INT-type slot/port mode no shutdown Assigning Area ID on an Interface To assign the OSPFv3 process to an interface, use the following command. The ipv6 ospf area command enables OSPFv3 on an interface and places the interface in the specified area. Additionally, the command creates the OSPFv3 process with ID on the router.
Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID to a VRF To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 on a non-default VRF, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process on a non-default VRF and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID} vrf {vrf-name} • The process ID range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} • number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
Interface: identifies the specific interface that is passive. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
Enabling OSPFv3 Graceful Restart Follow the procedure in this section to configure graceful restart for OSPFv3. By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA. . By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA.
• show run ospf Display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] database grace-lsa Display the currently configured OSPFv3 parameters for graceful restart (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf database [vrf vrf-name] database-summary Examples of the Graceful Restart show Commands The following example shows the show run ospf command.
Link State ID Advertising Router LS Seq Number Checksum Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : : : : : 6.16.192.66 100.1.1.1 0x80000001 0x1DF1 36 Te 5/3 180 Switch to Redundant Processor OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets. IPsec authentication ensures security in the transmission of OSPFv3 packets between IPsec-enabled routers.
• The security policy configured for an area is inherited by default on all interfaces in the area. • The security policy configured on an interface overrides any area-level configured security for the area to which the interface is assigned. • The configured authentication or encryption policy is applied to all OSPFv3 packets transmitted on the interface or in the area. The IPsec security associations (SAs) are the same on inbound and outbound traffic on an OSPFv3 interface.
• • key: specifies the text string used in authentication. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share key to exchange information. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Remove an IPsec authentication policy from an interface.
Configuring IPSec Authentication for an OSPFv3 Area To configure, remove, or display IPSec authentication for an OSPFv3 area, use the following commands. Prerequisite: Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 area, first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router (refer to Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6)). The security policy index (SPI) value must be unique to one IPSec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router.
area area-id encryption ipsec spi number esp encryption-algorithm [key-encryption-type] key authentication-algorithm [key-authentication-type] key • • • area area-id: specifies the area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For area-id, enter a number or an IPv6 prefix. • spi number: is the security policy index (SPI) value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. • esp encryption-algorithm: specifies the encryption algorithm used with ESP. The valid values are 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL.
Policy refcount Inbound ESP SPI Outbound ESP SPI Inbound ESP Auth Key Outbound ESP Auth Key Inbound ESP Cipher Key Outbound ESP Cipher Key Transform set : : : : : : : : 1 502 (0x1F6) 502 (0x1F6) 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 esp-3des esp-md5-hmac Crypto IPSec client security policy data Policy name Policy refcount Inbound AH SPI Outbound AH SPI Inbound AH Key Outbound AH K
transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The system provides several tools to troubleshoot OSPFv3 operation on the switch. This section describes typical, OSPFv3 troubleshooting scenarios.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
36 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table. However, in some cases, there may be a need to forward the packet based on other criteria: size, source, protocol type, destination, and so on.
• Destination port • TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: • Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. • If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
• Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirect-group PBR Exceptions (Permit) To create an exception to a redirect list, use thepermit command. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. The Dell Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries.
• tunnel is used to configure the tunnel settings • tunnel-id is used to redirect the traffic • track is used to track the object-id • track is to enable the tracking • FORMAT: A.B.C.D • FORMAT: slot/port • ip-protocol-number or protocol-type is the type of protocol to be redirected • FORMAT: 0-255 for IP protocol number, or enter protocol type • source ip-address or any or host ip-address is the Source’s IP address • FORMAT: A.B.C.
Example: Creating Multiple Rules for a Redirect-List Dell(conf)#ip redirect-list test Dell(conf-redirect-list)#seq 10 redirect Dell(conf-redirect-list)#seq 15 redirect Dell(conf-redirect-list)#seq 20 redirect Dell(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list test seq 10 redirect 10.1.1.2 ip 20.1.1.0/24 seq 15 redirect 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.0/25 seq 20 redirect 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.0/24 Dell(conf-redirect-list)# 10.1.1.2 ip 20.1.1.0/24 any 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.0/25 any 10.1.1.3 ip 20.1.1.
Example: Applying a Redirect-list to an Interface Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip redirect-group xyz Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# Example: Applying a Redirect-list to an Interface Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip redirect-group test Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip redirect-group xyz Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address ip redirect-group test ip redirect-group xyz shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#ip redirect-group test Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#ip redirect-group xyz Dell(conf-if-gi
(via Po 5) seq 35 redirect 42.1.1.2 seq 40 redirect 43.1.1.2 seq 45 redirect 31.1.1.2 [up], Next-hop reachable [up], Next-hop reachable [up], Next-hop reachable [up], Next-hop reachable [up], Next-hop reachable [up], Next-hop reachable icmp host 8.8.8.8 any, Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Next-hop reachable (via Vl 30) track 200 ip 12.0.0.0 255.0.0.197 13.0.0.0 255.0.0.
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/23)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.
View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23) seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23) seq 15 permit ip any any Applied interfaces: Te 2/11 EDGE_ROUTER# Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Redirect IPs Create Track Objects to track the Redirect IPs: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#track 3 ip host 42.1.1.
seq 20 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp any host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 25 redirect 43.1.1.2 track 4 ip host 7.7.7.7 host 144.144.144.144, Track 4 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) Applied interfaces: Te 2/28 Dell# Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Tunnel Interfaces Creating steps for Tunnel Interfaces: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel destination 40.1.1.2 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#exit Dell(conf)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: Dell#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 10 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp any any, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.
37 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop. Implementation Information The following information is necessary for implementing PIM-SM.
Refuse Multicast Traffic A host requesting to leave a multicast group sends an IGMP Leave message to the last-hop DR. If the host is the only remaining receiver for that group on the subnet, the last-hop DR is responsible for sending a PIM Prune message up the RPT to prune its branch to the RP. 1 After receiving an IGMP Leave message, the gateway removes the interface on which it is received from the outgoing interface list of the (*,G) entry.
ip multicast-routing Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. • Configuring S,G Expiry Timers • Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point • Configuring a Designated Router • Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1 Enable multicast routing on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing 2 Enable PIM-Sparse mode.
Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/11 TenGigabitEthernet 2/13 (10.87.31.5, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:01:24, expires 00:02:26, flags: FT Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 2/11, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/11 TenGigabitEthernet 1/12 TenGigabitEthernet 2/13 --More-- Configuring S,G Expiry Timers By default, S, G entries expire in 210 seconds. You can configure a global expiry time (for all [S,G] entries) or configure an expiry time for a particular entry.
Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point The rendezvous point (RP) is a PIM-enabled interface on a router that acts as the root a group-specific tree; every group must have an RP. • Identify an RP by the IP address of a PIM-enabled or Loopback interface. ip pim rp-address Example of Viewing an RP on a Loopback Interface Dell#sh run int loop0 ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 1.1.1.1/32 ip pim sparse-mode no shutdown Dell#sh run pim ! ip pim rp-address 1.1.1.1 group-address 224.0.0.
• Change the interval at which a router sends hello messages. INTERFACE mode ip pim query-interval seconds • Display the current value of these parameter. EXEC Privilege mode show ip pim interface Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet.
38 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
Configure PIM-SSM Configuring PIM-SSM is a two-step process. 1 Configure PIM-SSM. 2 Enable PIM-SSM for a range of addresses. Related Configuration Tasks • Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1 Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2 Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created.
To display the source to which a group is mapped, use the show ip igmp ssm-map [group] command. If you use the group option, the command displays the group-to-source mapping even if the group is not currently in the IGMP group table. If you do not specify the group option, the display is a list of groups currently in the IGMP group table that has a group-to-source mapping. To display the list of sources mapped to a group currently in the IGMP group table, use the show ip igmp groups group detail command.
! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime 239.0.0.2 Vlan 300 IGMPv2-Compat 00:00:07 Member Ports: Te 1/1 239.0.0.1 Vlan 400 INCLUDE 00:00:10 Never 10.11.4.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp ssm-map IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime 239.0.0.
4 The BSR floods the RP-Set throughout the domain periodically in case new C-RPs are announced, or an RP failure occurs. To enable RP election, perform the following steps: 1 Enter the following command to make a PIM router a BSR candidate: CONFIGURATION ip pim bsr-candidate 2 Enter the following command to make a PIM router a RP candidate: CONFIGURATION ip pim rp-candidate 3 Display Bootstrap Router information.
39 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
• Single MD can be monitored on max. of 4 MG ports. Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch. You can configure up to 128 source ports in a monitoring session. Only one destination port is supported in a monitoring session.
No N/A Dell# N/A yes Example of Configuring Another Monitoring Session with a Previously Used Destination Port Dell(conf)#monitor session 300 Dell(conf-mon-sess-300)#source TenGig 1/17 destination TenGig 1/4 direction tx % Error: Exceeding max MG ports for this MD port pipe.
Dell Networking OS Behavior: All monitored frames are tagged if the configured monitoring direction is egress (TX), regardless of whether the monitored port (MD) is a Layer 2 or Layer 3 port. If the MD port is a Layer 2 port, the frames are tagged with the VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the MD belongs. If the MD port is a Layer 3 port, the frames are tagged with VLAN ID 4095. If the MD port is in a Layer 3 VLAN, the frames are tagged with the respective Layer 3 VLAN ID.
Dell(conf)#monitor session 1 Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#source vl 40 dest ten 1/3 dir rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#flow-based enable Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit Dell(conf)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP Gre-Protocol FcMonitor ------ ------------------ ---------------------- --------0 Te 1/1 Te 1/2 rx Port 0.0.0.0 A N/A No 0 Po 10 Te 1/2 rx Port 0.0.0.0 A N/A No 1 Vl 40 Te 1/3 rx Flow 0.0.0.0 A N/A No Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate -------- ---- --- ---- ---- 0.0.0.
MONITOR SESSION mode flow-based enable 2 Define IP access-list rules that include the keyword monitor. For port monitoring, Dell Networking OS only considers traffic matching rules with the keyword monitor. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list Refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs). 3 Apply the ACL to the monitored port.
In a remote-port mirroring session, monitored traffic is tagged with a VLAN ID and switched on a user-defined, non-routable L2 VLAN. The VLAN is reserved in the network to carry only mirrored traffic, which is forwarded on all egress ports of the VLAN. Each intermediate switch that participates in the transport of mirrored traffic must be configured with the reserved L2 VLAN.
Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
• • • • • • • Maximum number of destination sessions supported on a switch: 64 Maximum number ports supported in a destination session: 64. You can configure any port as a destination port. You can configure additional destination ports in an active session. You can tunnel the mirrored traffic from multiple remote-port source sessions to the same destination port. By default, destination port sends the mirror traffic to the probe port by stripping off the rpm header.
* R R NUM 1 100 300 Status Inactive Active Active Description Q Ports T Fo 1/20/1 T Fo 1/24/1 Configuring the Sample Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches). Table 67.
Dell(conf)#interface vlan 100 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#mac access-group mac_acl1 in Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#exit Dell(conf)#inte te 1/30 Dell(conf-if-te-1/30)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/30)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface vlan 30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#mode remote-port-mirroring Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#tagged te 1/30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#channel-member te 1/28-29 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-10)#exit Dell(conf)#m
Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 2 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#source remote-vlan 20 destination te 1/5 Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#tagged destination te 0/4 Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 3 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#source remote-vlan 30 destination te 1/6 Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#tagged destination te 1/6 Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#end Dell# Dell#show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP ------ ------------------ ---- --------1 remote-vlan 10 T
Encapsulated Remote Port Monitoring Encapsulated Remote Port Monitoring (ERPM) copies traffic from source ports/port-channels or source VLANs and forwards the traffic using routable GRE-encapsulated packets to the destination IP address specified in the session. NOTE: When configuring ERPM, follow these guidelines • The Dell Networking OS supports ERPM source session only. Encapsulated packets terminate at the destination IP address or at the analyzer.
6 Enter the no disable command to enable the ERPM session. no disable The following example shows an ERPM configuration: Dell(conf)#monitor session 0 type erpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#source tengigabitethernet 1/9 direction rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#source port-channel 1 direction tx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#erpm source-ip 1.1.1.1 dest-ip 7.1.1.
ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. Figure 103.
• b Some tools support options to edit the capture file. We can make use of such features (for example: editcap ) and chop the ERPM header part and save it to a new trace file. This new file (i.e. the original mirrored packet) can be converted back into stream and fed to any egress interface. Using Python script • Either have a Linux server's ethernet port ip as the ERPM destination ip or connect the ingress interface of the server to the ERPM MirrorToPort.
VLTi link is added as an implicit member of the RPM vlan. As a result, the mirrored traffic also reaches the peer VLT device effecting VLTi link's bandwidth usage. To mitigate this issue, the L2 VLT egress mask drops the duplicate packets that egress out of the VLT port. If the LAG status of the peer VLT device is OPER-UP, then the other VLT peer blocks the transmission of packets received through VLTi to its port or LAG.
Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution Mirroring Orphan Ports across VLT Devices — In this scenario, an orphan port on the primary VLT device is mirrored to another orphan port on the secondary VLT device through the ICL LAG. The port analyzer is connected to the secondary VLT device. No restrictions apply to the RPM session. The following example shows the configuration on the primary VLT device:source orphan port destination remote vlan direction rx/tx/both.
40 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
• • A switch can have one or more primary VLANs, and it can have none. • A primary VLAN has one or more secondary VLANs. • A primary VLAN and each of its secondary VLANs decrement the available number of VLAN IDs in the switch. • A primary VLAN has one or more promiscuous ports. • A primary VLAN might have one or more trunk ports, or none. Secondary VLAN — a subdomain of the primary VLAN. • There are two types of secondary VLAN — community VLAN and isolated VLAN.
• Display PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show vlan private-vlan [community | interface | isolated | primary | primary_vlan | interface interface] • Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show vlan private-vlan mapping • Set the PVLAN mode of the selected port.
• trunk (inter-switch PVLAN hub port) Example of the switchport mode private-vlan Command For interface details, refer to Enabling a Physical Interface in the Interfaces chapter. NOTE: You cannot add interfaces that are configured as PVLAN ports to regular VLANs. You also cannot add “regular” ports (ports not configured as PVLAN ports) to PVLANs. The following example shows the switchport mode private-vlan command on a port and on a port channel.
Add PVLAN trunk ports to the VLAN only as tagged interfaces. You can enter interfaces in numeric or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add promiscuous ports or PVLAN trunk ports to the PVLAN (no host or regular ports). 6 (OPTIONAL) Assign an IP address to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode ip address ip address 7 (OPTIONAL) Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs.
interface vlan vlan-id 2 Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3 Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to isolated. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode isolated 4 Add one or more host ports to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode tagged interface or untagged interface You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add ports defined as host to the VLAN.
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 104. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: • Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. • Te 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. • Te 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
In parallel, on S4810: • Te 1/3 is a promiscuous port and Te 1/25 is a PVLAN trunk port, assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. • Te 1/4-6 are host ports. Te 1/4 and Te 1/5 are assigned to the community VLAN 4001, while Te 1/6 is assigned to the isolated VLAN 4003. The result is that: • The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500.
The following example shows using the show vlan private-vlan mapping command. S50-1#show vlan private-vlan mapping Private Vlan: Primary : 4000 Isolated : 4003 Community : 4001 NOTE: In the following example, notice the addition of the PVLAN codes – P, I, and C – in the left column. The following example shows viewing the VLAN status.
41 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
Table 70. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking OS Supports Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode disable • Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration. INTERFACE mode no spanning-tree pvst Example of Viewing PVST+ Configuration To display your PVST+ configuration, use the show config command from PROTOCOL PVST mode.
Figure 106. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Te 1/32 Port 375 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/22) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. • Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
Figure 107. PVST+ with Extend System ID • Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID. PROTOCOL PVST mode extend system-id Example of Viewing the Extend System ID in a PVST+ Configuration Dell(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/32 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tag
protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 300 bridge-priority 4096 704 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)
42 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 72.
Feature Direction Create Policy Maps Ingress + Egress Create Input Policy Maps Ingress Honor DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 108.
• Implementation Information • Port-Based QoS Configurations • Policy-Based QoS Configurations • Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment • Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing • Weighted Random Early Detection • Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space • Configuring Weights and ECN for WRED • Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes • Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets • Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking Implementation Information The Dell Networking QoS implementat
dot1p Queue Number 5 3 6 3 7 3 • Change the priority of incoming traffic on the interface. dot1p-priority Example of Configuring a dot1p Priority on an Interface Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#dot1p-priority 1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#end Honoring dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic By default, Dell Networking OS does not honor dot1p priorities on ingress traffic.
Configuring Port-Based Rate Policing If the interface is a member of a VLAN, you may specify the VLAN for which ingress packets are policed. • Rate policing ingress traffic on an interface. INTERFACE mode rate police Example of the rate police Command The following example shows configuring rate policing.
Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 109. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them.
Use step 1 or step 2 to start creating a Layer 3 class map. 1 Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2 Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3 Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} After you create a class-map, Dell Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five ACLs. Match-all class-maps allow only one ACL. 4 Link the class-map to a queue.
Use Step 1 or Step 2 to start creating a Layer 2 class map. 1 Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2 Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3 Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode match mac After you create a class-map, Dell Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five access-lists. Match-all class-maps allow only one. You can match against only one VLAN ID. 4 Link the class-map to a queue.
Examples of Traffic Classifications The following example shows incorrect traffic classifications.
Create a QoS Policy There are two types of QoS policies — input and output. Input QoS policies regulate Layer 3 and Layer 2 ingress traffic. The regulation mechanisms for input QoS policies are rate policing and setting priority values. • Layer 3 — QoS input policies allow you to rate police and set a DSCP or dot1p value. In addition, you can configure a drop precedence for incoming packets based on their DSCP value by using a DSCP color map. For more information, see DSCP Color Maps.
Creating an Output QoS Policy To create an output QoS policy, use the following commands. 1 Create an output QoS policy. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-output 2 After you configure an output QoS policy, do one or more of the following: Scheduler Strict — Policy-based Strict-priority Queueing configuration is done through scheduler strict. It is applied to Qos-policyoutput. When scheduler strict is applied to multiple Queues, high queue number takes precedence.
• Assign each queue a bandwidth percentage ranging from 1 to 100%, in increments of 1%. bandwidth-percentage Specifying WRED Drop Precedence You can configure the WRED drop precedence in an output QoS policy. • Specify a WRED profile to yellow and/or green traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode wred For more information, refer to Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic. Create Policy Maps There are two types of policy maps: input and output.
Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Dell Networking OS provides the ability to honor DSCP values on ingress packets using Trust DSCP feature. The following table lists the standard DSCP definitions and indicates to which queues Dell Networking OS maps DSCP values. When you configure trust DSCP, the matched packets and matched bytes counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics. Table 75.
Table 77. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping dot1p Queue ID 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 The dot1p value is also honored for frames on the default VLAN. For more information, refer to Priority-Tagged Frames on the Default VLAN. • Enable the trust dot1p feature. POLICY-MAP-IN mode trust dot1p Mapping dot1p Values to Service Queues All traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0.
• You cannot apply an input Layer 2 QoS policy on an interface you also configure with vlan-stack access. • If you apply a service policy that contains an ACL to more than one interface, Dell Networking OS uses ACL optimization to conserve CAM space. The ACL optimization behavior detects when an ACL exists in the CAM rather than writing it to the CAM multiple times. • Apply an input policy map to an interface.
DSCP Color Maps This section describes how to configure color maps and how to display the color map and color map configuration. This sections consists of the following topics: • Creating a DSCP Color Map • Displaying Color Maps • Display Color Map Configuration Creating a DSCP Color Map You can create a DSCP color map to outline the differentiated services codepoint (DSCP) mappings to the appropriate color mapping (green, yellow, red) for the input traffic.
Create the DSCP color map profile, bat-enclave-map, with a yellow drop precedence , and set the DSCP values to 9,10,11,13,15,16 Dell(conf)# qos dscp-color-map bat-enclave-map Dell(conf-dscp-color-map)# dscp yellow 9,10,11,13,15,16 Dell (conf-dscp-color-map)# exit Assign the color map, bat-enclave-map to interface te 1/11 .
Display detailed information about a color policy for a specific interface Dell# show qos dscp-color-policy detail tengigabitethernet 1/10 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment By default while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, Dell Networking OS does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields.
Weighted Random Early Detection Weighted random early detection (WRED) is a congestion avoidance mechanism that drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed. The WRED congestion avoidance mechanism drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed. Traffic is a mixture of various kinds of packets. The rate at which some types of packets arrive might be greater than others.
Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1 Create a WRED profile. CONFIGURATION mode wred-profile 2 Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values. WRED mode threshold Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell Networking OS should apply the profile. Dell Networking OS assigns a color (also called drop precedence) — red, yellow, or green — to each packet based on it DSCP value before queuing it.
Displaying WRED Drop Statistics To display WRED drop statistics, use the following command. • Display the number of packets Dell Networking OS the WRED profile drops.
as many entries as possible, and then generates an CAM-full error message (shown in the following example). The partial policy-map configuration might cause unintentional system behavior.
for applications that are time-sensitive, such as video on demand (VoD) or voice over IP (VoIP) applications. In such cases, you can use ECN in conjunction with WRED to resolve the dropping of packets under congested conditions. Using ECN, the packets are marked for transmission at a later time after the network recovers from the heavy traffic state to an optimal load. In this manner, enhanced performance and throughput are achieved.
Table 79. Scenarios of WRED and ECN Configuration Queue Configuration Service-Pool Configuration WRED Threshold Expected Functionality Relationship Q threshold = Q-T, Service pool threshold = SP-T WRED ECN WRED ECN 0 0 X X X WRED/ECN not applicable 1 0 0 X X Queue based WRED, 1 X Q-T < SP-T No ECN marking SP-T < Q-T SP based WRED, No ECN marking 1 1 0 X X Queue-based ECN marking above queue threshold.
mode Dell(conf) #service-pool wred green pool0 thresh-1 pool1 thresh-2 Dell(conf) #service-pool wred yellow pool0 thresh-3 pool1 thresh-4 Dell(conf) #service-pool wred weight pool0 11 pool1 4 5 Create a service class and associate the threshold weight of the shared buffer with each of the queues per port in the egress direction.
class-map match-any ecn_0_cmap match ip access-group ecn_0 set-color yellow ! policy-map-input ecn_0_pmap service-queue 0 class-map ecn_0_cmap Applying this policy-map “ecn_0_pmap” will mark all the packets with ‘ecn == 0’ as yellow packets on queue0 (default queue). Classifying Incoming Packets Using ECN and Color-Marking Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded.
You can use the ecn keyword with the ip access-list standard, ip access-list extended, seq, and permit commands for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs to match incoming packets with the specified ECN values. Similar to ‘dscp’ qualifier in the existing L3 ACL command, the ‘ecn’ qualifier can be used along with all other supported ACL match qualifiers such as SIP/DIP/TCP/UDP/SRC PORT/DST PORT/ ICMP. Until Release 9.3(0.
Sample configuration to mark non-ecn packets as “yellow” with single traffic class Consider the use case where the packet with DSCP value “40” need to be enqueued in queue#2 and packets with DSCP value as 50 need to be enqueued in queue#3. And all the packets with ecn value as ‘0’ must be marked as ‘yellow’. The above requirement can be achieved using either of the two approaches. The above requirement can be achieved using either of the two approaches.
match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50_ecn ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-map class_dscp_50 Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface To process Layer 3 packets that contain a dot1p (IEEE 802.1p) VLAN Layer 2 header, configure VLAN tags on a Layer 3 port interface which is configured with an IP address but has no VLAN associated with it.
Dell(conf-class-map)#match ipdscp 5 3 Configure an IP VLAN ID as a match criterion. CLASS-MAP mode Dell(conf-class-map)#match ip vlan 5 4 Create a QoS input policy. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#qos-policy-input pp_qospolicy 5 Configure the DSCP value to be set on matched packets. QOS-POLICY-IN mode Dell(conf-qos-policy-in)#set ip-dscp 5 6 Create an input policy map. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#policy-map-input pp_policmap 7 Create a service queue to associate the class map and QoS policy map.
Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 5 (interface Fo 1/148) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 9 (interface Fo 1/152) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 13 (interface Fo 1/156) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED
UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST UCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST 736 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Quality of Service (QoS)
43 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Implementation Information Dell Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in Dell Networking OS. Table 80.
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in Dell Networking OS. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1 Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on Dell Networking OS. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2 Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/4 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary Dell#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 2.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 4.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 4.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 8.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 8.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 12.0.0.
neighbor ip-address • You can use this command multiple times to exchange RIP information with as many RIP networks as you want. Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving RIP routing information. ROUTER RIP mode passive-interface interface Assigning a Prefix List to RIP Routes Another method of controlling RIP (or any routing protocol) routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. A prefix list is applied to incoming or outgoing routes.
redistribute ospf process-id [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric value] [routemap map-name] Configure the following parameters: • process-id: the range is from 1 to 65535. • metric: the range is from 0 to 16. • map-name: the name of a configured route map. To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode.
Distance: (default is 120) Dell# To configure an interface to receive or send both versions of RIP, include 1 and 2 in the command syntax. The command syntax for sending both RIPv1 and RIPv2 and receiving only RIPv2 is shown in the following example. Dell(conf-if)#ip rip send version 1 2 Dell(conf-if)#ip rip receive version 2 The following example of the show ip protocols command confirms that both versions are sent out that interface.
If you must perform routing between discontiguous subnets, disable automatic summarization. With automatic route summarization disabled, subnets are advertised. The autosummary command requires no other configuration commands. To disable automatic route summarization, enter no autosummary in ROUTER RIP mode. NOTE: If you enable the ip split-horizon command on an interface, the system does not advertise the summarized address.
Example of the debug ip rip Command The following example shows the confirmation when you enable the debug function. Dell#debug ip rip RIP protocol debug is ON Dell# To disable RIP, use the no debug ip rip command. RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names.
Core 2 RIP Output The examples in the section show the core 2 RIP output. Examples of the show ip Commands to View Core 2 Information • To display Core 2 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. • To display Core 2 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. • To display Core 2 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command. The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 2.
Output delay 8 milliseconds between packets Automatic network summarization is in effect Outgoing filter for all interfaces is Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send TenGigabitEthernet 2/4 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/5 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/3 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.300.10.0 10.200.10.0 10.11.20.0 10.11.10.
10.11.30.0/24 10.0.0.0/8 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.2.0/24 Core3# directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 auto-summary directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/23 auto-summary directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/24 auto-summary The following command shows the show ip routes command to view the RIP setup on Core 3.
RIP Configuration Summary Examples of Viewing RIP Configuration on Core 2 and Core 3 The following example shows viewing the RIP configuration on Core 2. ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.11.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.11.20.2/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.200.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.250.10.1/24 no shutdown router rip version 2 10.200.10.0 10.300.10.0 10.11.10.0 10.11.20.
44 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
Setting the RMON Alarm To set an alarm on any MIB object, use the rmon alarm or rmon hc-alarm command in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION mode. • Set an alarm on any MIB object.
CONFIGURATION mode [no] rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner string] • number: assigned event number, which is identical to the eventIndex in the eventTable in the RMON MIB. The value must be an integer from 1 to 65,535 and be unique in the RMON Event Table. • log: (Optional) generates an RMON log entry when the event is triggered and sets the eventType in the RMON MIB to log or logand-trap. Default is no log.
[no] rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number] [interval seconds] • controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. • integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON group of statistics. The value must be a unique index in the RMON History Table. • owner: (Optional) specifies the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. The default is a null-terminated string.
45 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanningtree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.
• Dell Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command. When using the range command, Dell Networking recommends limiting the range to five ports and 40 VLANs.
Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. • Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. • Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. To enable RSTP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the following commands.
Figure 112. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. Dell#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.379, designated path cost 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU : sent 121, received 5 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 380 (TenGigabitEthernet 2/4) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.380 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
The following table displays the default values for RSTP. Table 82.
Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps, use the following command. • Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Modifying Interface Parameters On interfaces in Layer 2 mode, you can set the port cost and port priority values. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The previous table lists the default values. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port.
• Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode bridge-priority priority-value • priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535. The lower the number assigned, the more likely this bridge becomes the root bridge. The default is 32768. Entries must be multiples of 4096. Example of the bridge-priority Command A console message appears when a new root bridge has been assigned.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address switchport spanning-tree rstp edge-port shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-2/1)# Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Use RSTP fast hellos to achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed. To achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster, use RSTP fast hellos.
46 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
47 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
Enabling AAA Accounting The aaa accounting command allows you to create a record for any or all of the accounting functions monitored. To enable AAA accounting, use the following command. • Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function. CONFIGURATION mode aaa accounting {commands | exec | suppress | system level} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} The variables are: • system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration.
Example of Configuring AAA Accounting to Track EXEC and EXEC Privilege Level Command Use In the following sample configuration, AAA accounting is set to track all usage of EXEC commands and commands on privilege level 15.
NOTE: If a console user logs in with RADIUS authentication, the privilege level is applied from the RADIUS server if the privilege level is configured for that user in RADIUS, whether you configure RADIUS authorization. NOTE: RADIUS and TACACS servers support VRF-awareness functionality. You can create RADIUS and TACACS groups and then map multiple servers to a group. The group to which you map multiple servers is bound to a single VRF.
3 Assign a method-list-name or the default list to the terminal line. LINE mode login authentication {method-list-name | default} To view the configuration, use the show config command in LINE mode or the show running-config in EXEC Privilege mode. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends using the none method only as a backup. This method does not authenticate users. The none and enable methods do not work with secure shell (SSH). You can create multiple method lists and assign them to different terminal lines.
The following example shows enabling local authentication for console and remote authentication for the VTY lines. Dell(config)# aaa authentication enable mymethodlist radius tacacs Dell(config)# line vty 0 9 Dell(config-line-vty)# enable authentication mymethodlist Server-Side Configuration Using AAA authentication, the switch acts as a RADIUS or TACACS+ client to send authentication requests to a TACACS+ or RADIUS server.
Obscuring Passwords and Keys By default, the service password-encryption command stores encrypted passwords. For greater security, you can also use the service obscure-passwords command to prevent a user from reading the passwords and keys, including RADIUS, TACACS+ keys, router authentication strings, VRRP authentication by obscuring this information. Passwords and keys are stored encrypted in the configuration file and by default are displayed in the encrypted form when the configuration is displayed.
After you configure other privilege levels, enter those levels by adding the level parameter after the enable command or by configuring a user name or password that corresponds to the privilege level. For more information about configuring user names, refer to Configuring a Username and Password. By default, commands in Dell Networking OS are assigned to different privilege levels. You can access those commands only if you have access to that privilege level.
Configuring the Enable Password Command To configure Dell Networking OS, use the enable command to enter EXEC Privilege level 15. After entering the command, Dell Networking OS requests that you enter a password. Privilege levels are not assigned to passwords, rather passwords are assigned to a privilege level. You can always change a password for any privilege level. To change to a different privilege level, enter the enable command, then the privilege level.
• 2 Secret: Specify the secret for the user. Configure a password for privilege level. CONFIGURATION mode enable password [level level] [encryption-mode] password Configure the optional and required parameters: • level level: specify a level from 0 to 15. Level 15 includes all levels. • encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. • password: enter a string up to 32 characters long. To change only the password for the enable command, configure only the password parameter.
The following example shows the Telnet session for user john. The show privilege command output confirms that john is in privilege level 8. In EXEC Privilege mode, john can access only the commands listed. In CONFIGURATION mode, john can access only the snmpserver commands. apollo% telnet 172.31.1.53 Trying 172.31.1.53... Connected to 172.31.1.53. Escape character is '^]'.
EXEC Privilege mode enable or enable privilege-level • If you do not enter a privilege level, Dell Networking OS sets it to 15 by default. Move to a lower privilege level. EXEC Privilege mode disable level-number • level-number: The level-number you wish to set. If you enter disable without a level-number, your security level is 1. Resetting a Password To reset a password on the system, follow these steps. 1 Connect to the system using a console.
| | +-----------------------------+ Use the ^ and v keys to select which entry is highlighted. Press enter to boot the selected OS, 'e' to edit the commands before booting or 'c' for a command-line. RADIUS Remote authentication dial-in user service (RADIUS) is a distributed client/server protocol. This protocol transmits authentication, authorization, and configuration information between a central RADIUS server and a RADIUS client (the Dell Networking system).
ACL Configuration Information The RADIUS server can specify an ACL. If an ACL is configured on the RADIUS server, and if that ACL is present, the user may be allowed access based on that ACL. If the ACL is absent, authorization fails, and a message is logged indicating this. RADIUS can specify an ACL for the user if both of the following are true: • If an ACL is absent. • If there is a very long delay for an entry, or a denied entry because of an ACL, and a message is logged.
Defining a AAA Method List to be Used for RADIUS To configure RADIUS to authenticate or authorize users on the system, create a AAA method list. Default method lists do not need to be explicitly applied to the line, so they are not mandatory. To create a method list, use the following commands. • Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the RADIUS authentication method.
• auth-port port-number: the range is from 0 to 65535. Enter a UDP port number. The default is 1812. • retransmit retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3. • timeout seconds: the range is from 0 to 1000. Default is 5 seconds. • key [encryption-type] key: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text, and a string for the key. The key can be up to 42 characters long. This key must match the key configured on the RADIUS server host.
Monitoring RADIUS To view information on RADIUS transactions, use the following command. • View RADIUS transactions to troubleshoot problems. EXEC Privilege mode debug radius Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol Support for RADIUS Authentication Dell Networking OS supports Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAPv2) with RADIUS authentication. RADIUS is used to authenticate Telnet, SSH, console, REST, and OMI access to the switch based on the AAA configuration.
TACACS+ Dell Networking OS supports terminal access controller access control system (TACACS+ client, including support for login authentication. Configuration Task List for TACACS+ The following list includes the configuration task for TACACS+ functions.
If authentication fails using the primary method, Dell Networking OS employs the second method (or third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable, but the server key is invalid, Dell Networking OS proceeds to the next authentication method. In the following example, the TACACS+ is incorrect, but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method. First bold line: Server key purposely changed to incorrect value.
When configuring a TACACS+ server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the key password. Example of Specifying a TACACS+ Server Host Dell(conf)# Dell(conf)#aaa authentication login tacacsmethod tacacs+ Dell(conf)#aaa authentication exec tacacsauthorization tacacs+ Dell(conf)#tacacs-server host 25.1.1.
Certain TACACS+ servers do not authenticate the device if you use the aaa authorization commands level default local tacacs+ command. To resolve the issue, use the aaa authorization commands level default tacacs+ local command. Protection from TCP Tiny and Overlapping Fragment Attacks Tiny and overlapping fragment attack is a class of attack where configured ACL entries — denying TCP port-specific traffic — is bypassed and traffic is sent to its destination although denied by the ACL.
To disable SSH server functions, use the no ip ssh server enable command. Using SCP with SSH to Copy a Software Image To use secure copy (SCP) to copy a software image through an SSH connection from one switch to another, use the following commands. 1 On Switch 1, set the SSH port number ( port 22 by default). CONFIGURATION MODE ip ssh server port number 2 On Switch 1, enable SSH. CONFIGURATION MODE copy ssh server enable 3 On Switch 2, invoke SCP.
User name to login remote host: admin Password to login remote host: Removing the RSA Host Keys and Zeroizing Storage Use the crypto key zeroize rsa command to delete the host key pairs, both the public and private key information for RSA 1 and or RSA 2 types. Note that when FIPS mode is enabled there is no RSA 1 key pair. Any memory currently holding these keys is zeroized (written over with zeroes) and the NVRAM location where the keys are stored for persistence across reboots is also zeroized.
• diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1 • diffie-hellman-group1-sha1 • diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 When FIPS is enabled, the default is diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Example of Configuring a Key Exchange Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a key exchange algorithm.
The following HMAC algorithms are available: • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-sha2-256 The default list of HMAC algorithm is in the following order: • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256, hmac-sha1, hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list.
Configuring the SSH Client Cipher List To configure the cipher list supported by the SSH client, use the ip ssh cipher cipher-list command in CONFIGURATION mode. cipher-list-: Enter a space-delimited list of ciphers the SSH Client supports. The following ciphers are available. • 3des-cbc • aes128-cbc • aes192-cbc • aes256-cbc • aes128-ctr • aes192-ctr • aes256-ctr The default cipher list is in the given order: aes256-ctr, aes256-cbc, aes192-ctr, aes192-cbc, aes128-ctr, aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc.
Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled. Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP Using RSA Authentication of SSH The following procedure authenticates an SSH client based on an RSA key using RSA authentication. This method uses SSH version 2. 1 On the SSH client (Unix machine), generate an RSA key, as shown in the following example. 2 Copy the public key id_rsa.pub to the Dell Networking system. 3 Disable password authentication if enabled.
ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable 7 Bind shosts and rhosts to host-based authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ip ssh pub-key-file flash://filename or ip ssh rhostsfile flash://filename Examples of Creating shosts and rhosts The following example shows creating shosts. admin@Unix_client# cd /etc/ssh admin@Unix_client# ls moduli sshd_config ssh_host_dsa_key.pub ssh_host_key.pub ssh_host_rsa_key.pub ssh_config ssh_host_dsa_key ssh_host_key ssh_host_rsa_key admin@Unix_client# cat ssh_host_rsa_key.
Troubleshooting SSH To troubleshoot SSH, use the following information. You may not bind id_rsa.pub to RSA authentication while logged in via the console. In this case, this message displays:%Error: No username set for this term. Enable host-based authentication on the server (Dell Networking system) and the client (Unix machine). The following message appears if you attempt to log in via SSH and host-based is disabled on the client.
VTY Line Local Authentication and Authorization Dell Networking OS retrieves the access class from the local database. To use this feature: 1 Create a username. 2 Enter a password. 3 Assign an access class. 4 Enter a privilege level. You can assign line authentication on a per-VTY basis; it is a simple password authentication, using an access-class as authorization. Configure local authentication globally and configure access classes on a per-user basis.
Dell(config-line-vty)#access-class deny10 Dell(config-line-vty)#end (same applies for radius and line authentication) VTY MAC-SA Filter Support Dell Networking OS supports MAC access lists which permit or deny users based on their source MAC address. With this approach, you can implement a security policy based on the source MAC address. To apply a MAC ACL on a VTY line, use the same access-class command as IP ACLs. The following example shows how to deny incoming connections from subnet 10.0.0.
Overview of RBAC With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role. Users are granted permissions based on their user roles, not on their individual user ID. User roles are created for job functions and through those roles they acquire the permissions to perform their associated job function. Each user can be assigned only a single role. Many users can have the same role. The Dell Networking OS supports the constrained RBAC model.
You must specify at least local authentication. For consistency, the best practice is to define the same authentication method list across all lines, in the same order of comparison; for example VTY and console port. You could also use the default authentication method to apply to all the LINES; for example, console port and VTY. NOTE: The authentication method list must be in the same order as the authorization method list.
netoperator netadmin Exec Config Interface Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC secadmin Exec Config Line sysadmin Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC User Roles This section describes how to create a new user role and configure command permissions and contains the following topics.
Verify that the user role, myrole, has inherited the security administrator permissions. The output highlighted in bold indicates that the user role has successfully inherited the security administrator permissions.
The following example allows the security administrator (secadmin) to access Interface mode.
In the following example the command protocol permissions are reset to their original setting or one or more of the system-defined roles and any roles that inherited permissions from them. Dell(conf)#role configure reset protocol Adding and Deleting Users from a Role To create a user name that is authenticated based on a user role, use the username name password encryption-type password role role-name command in CONFIGURATION mode.
Configure AAA Authorization for Roles Authorization services determine if the user has permission to use a command in the CLI. Users with only privilege levels can use commands in privilege-or-role mode (the default) provided their privilege level is the same or greater than the privilege level of those commands. Users with defined roles can use commands provided their role is permitted to use those commands. Role inheritance is also used to determine authorization.
login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 5 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 6 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 7 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 8 login authentication ucraaa authorization exec ucraaa accounting commands role netadmin line vty 9 login authenticat
Role Accounting This section describes how to configure role accounting and how to display active sessions for roles. This sections consists of the following topics: • Configuring AAA Accounting for Roles • Applying an Accounting Method to a Role • Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles Configuring AAA Accounting for Roles To configure AAA accounting for roles, use the aaa accounting command in CONFIGURATION mode.
• Displaying Information About Roles Logged into the Switch • Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles Displaying User Roles To display user roles using the show userrole command in EXEC Privilege mode, use the show userroles and show users commands in EXEC privilege mode.
Two Factor Authentication (2FA) Two factor authentication also known as 2FA, strengthens the login security by providing one time password (OTP) in addition to username and password. 2FA supports RADIUS authentications with Console, Telnet, and SSHv2. To perform 2FA, follow these steps: • When the Network access server (NAS) prompts for the username and password, provide the inputs. • If the credentials are valid: • • RADIUS server sends a request to the SMS–OTP daemon to generate an OTP for the user.
Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled. Challenge Response Auth : enabled. Vty Encryption HMAC 2 aes128-cbc hmac-md5 4 aes128-cbc hmac-md5 * 5 aes128-cbc hmac-md5 Dell# Remote IP 10.16.127.141 10.16.127.141 10.16.127.141 SMS-OTP Mechanism A short message service one time password (SMS-OTP) is a free RADIUS module to implement two factor authentication. There are multiple 2FA mechanisms that can be deployed with the RADIUS.
ICMPv4 message types Timestamp reply (14) Information request (15) Information reply (16) Address mask request (17) Address mask reply (18) NOTE: The Dell Networking OS does not suppress the ICMP message type echo request (8). Table 85.
48 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell Networking OS. VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.
Figure 113. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. • Dell Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
2 Assign access and trunk ports to a VLAN (Creating Access and Trunk Ports). 3 Enabling VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN. Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag • Configuring Dell Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports • Debugging VLAN Stacking • VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands.
Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN To enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN, use the following command. • Enable VLAN-Stacking for the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stackingenabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q.
NOTE: You can add a trunk port to an 802.1Q VLAN as well as a Stacking VLAN only when the TPID 0x8100. 2 Add the port to a 802.1Q VLAN as tagged or untagged. INTERFACE VLAN mode [tagged | untagged] Example of Configuring a Trunk Port as a Hybrid Port and Adding it to Stacked VLANs In the following example, TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 is a trunk port that is configured as a hybrid port and then added to VLAN 100 as untagged VLAN 101 as tagged, and VLAN 103, which is a stacking VLAN.
Dell#debug member port tengigabitethernet 2/4 vlan id : 603 (MT), 100(T), 101(NU) Dell# VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes. In a VLAN-stacking network, after the frame is double tagged, the outer tag TPID must match the TPID of the next-hop system. While 802.1Q requires that the inner tag TPID is 0x8100, it does not require a specific value for the outer tag TPID.
Figure 114.
Figure 115.
Figure 116. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch The following table details the outcome of matched and mismatched TPIDs in a VLAN-stacking network with the S-Series. Table 86. Behaviors for Mismatched TPID Network Position Incoming Packet TPID System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
Network Position Incoming Packet TPID System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
Honoring the Incoming DEI Value To honor the incoming DEI value, you must explicitly map the DEI bit to an Dell Networking OS drop precedence. Precedence can have one of three colors. Precedence Description Green High-priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped. Yellow Lower-priority packets that are treated as best-effort. Red Lowest-priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion status).
Te 2/9 Te 2/10 Yellow Yellow 0 0 Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking One of the ways to ensure quality of service for customer VLAN-tagged frames is to use the 802.1p priority bits in the tag to indicate the level of QoS desired. When an S-Tag is added to incoming customer frames, the 802.1p bits on the S-Tag may be configured statically for each customer or derived from the C-Tag using Dynamic Mode CoS. Dynamic Mode CoS maps the C-Tag 802.1p value to a S-Tag 802.1p value. Figure 117.
Likewise, in the following configuration, packets with dot1p priority 0–3 are marked as dot1p 7 in the outer tag and queued to Queue 3. Rate policing is according to qos-policy-input 3. All other packets will have outer dot1p 0 and hence are queued to Queue 1. They are therefore policed according to qos-policy-input 1.
Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) use a reserved destination MAC address called the bridge group address, which is 01-80C2-00-00-00. Only spanning-tree bridges on the local area network (LAN) recognize this address and process the BPDU.
Dell Networking OS Behavior: In Dell Networking OS versions prior to 8.2.1.0, the MAC address that Dell Networking systems use to overwrite the Bridge Group Address on ingress was non-configurable. The value of the L2PT MAC address was the Dell Networking-unique MAC address, 01-01-e8-00-00-00.
Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1 Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2 Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3 Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN.
4 Set a maximum rate at which the RPM processes BPDUs for L2PT. VLAN STACKING mode protocol-tunnel rate-limit The default is: no rate limiting. The range is from 64 to 320 kbps. Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.
49 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
hardware sampling rate is backed-off from 512 to 1024. Note that port 1 maintains its sampling rate of 16384; port 1 is unaffected because it maintains its configured sampling rate of 16384.: • • • If the interface states are up and the sampling rate is not configured on the port, the default sampling rate is calculated based on the line speed. If the interface states are shut down, the sampling rate is set using the global sampling rate.
Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global default extended maximum header size: 128 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.1, Agent IP addr: 1.1.1.
Example of the show sflow command when the sflow max-header-size extended is configured globally Dell(conf-if-te-1/10)#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 86400 Global default extended maximum header size: 256 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.12, Agent IP addr: 100.1.1.
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Global) The first bold line indicates sFlow is globally enabled. The second bold lines indicate sFlow is enabled on Te 1/16 and Te 1/17 Dell#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Line Card) Dell#show sflow Stack-unit 1 Stack-unit 1 Samples rcvd from h/w Total UDP packets exported UDP packets exported via RPM UDP packets dropped :0 :0 :0 :36 Configuring Specify Collectors The sflow collector command allows identification of sFlow collectors to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. You can specify up to two sFlow collectors. If you specify two collectors, the samples are sent to both.
sFlow on LAG ports When a physical port becomes a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Enabling Extended sFlow Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depend on the type of sampled packet. The platform supports extended-switch information processing only. Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depending on the type of sampled packet. You can enable the following options: • extended-switch — 802.1Q VLAN ID and 802.
Important Points to Remember • To export extended-gateway data, BGP must learn the IP destination address. • If the IP destination address is not learned via BGP the Dell Networking system does not export extended-gateway data. • If the IP source address is learned via IGP, srcAS and srcPeerAS are zero. • The srcAS and srcPeerAS might be zero even though the IP source address is learned via BGP.
50 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
MIBs are hierarchically structured and use object identifiers to address managed objects, but managed objects also have a textual name called an object descriptor. You can download the latest MIB files from the following path: • https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/Main/SupportMain.aspx. Implementation Information The following describes SNMP implementation information.
FIPS mode only if SNMPv3 users are not previously set up. If previously configured users exist on the system, you must delete the existing users before you change the FIPS mode. Keep the following points in mind when you configure the AES128-CFB algorithm for SNMPv3: 1 SNMPv3 authentication provides only the sha option when the FIPS mode is enabled. 2 SNMPv3 privacy provides only the aes128 privacy option when the FIPS mode is enabled.
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is a user-based security model that provides password authentication for user security and encryption for data security and privacy. Three sets of configurations are available for SNMP read/write operations: no password or privacy, password privileges, password and privacy privileges. You can configure a maximum of 16 users even if they are in different groups.
snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write view privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type. • Configure the user with an authorization password (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server user name group-name 3 noauth auth md5 auth-password • Configure an SNMP group (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server group groupname {oid-tree} auth read name write name • Configure an SNMPv3 view.
Examples of Reading the Value of Managed Objects In the following example, the value “4” displays in the OID before the IP address for IPv4. For an IPv6 IP address, a value of “16” displays. > snmpget -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 sysUpTime.0 DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (32852616) 3 days, 19:15:26.16 > snmpget -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.161 .1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0 The following example shows reading the value of the next managed object. > snmpgetnext -v 2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.
snmp-server location text You may use up to 55 characters. • The default is None. (From a management station) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number). CONFIGURATION mode snmpset -v version -c community agent-ip sysContact.0 s “contact-info” You may use up to 55 characters. • The default is None.
Enable all of the RFC-defined traps using the snmp-server enable traps snmp command from CONFIGURATION mode. 3 Specify the interfaces out of which Dell Networking OS sends SNMP traps. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server trap-source Example of RFC-Defined SNMP Traps and Related Enable Commands The following example lists the RFC-defined SNMP traps and the command used to enable each. The coldStart and warmStart traps are enabled using a single command. snmp authentication string.
envmon temperature MINOR_TEMP: Minor alarm: chassis temperature MINOR_TEMP_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: chassis temperature normal (%s %d temperature is within threshold of %dC) MAJOR_TEMP: Major alarm: chassis temperature high (%s temperature reaches or exceeds threshold of %dC) MAJOR_TEMP_CLR: Major alarm cleared: chassis temperature lower (%s %d temperature is within threshold of %dC) envmon fan FAN_TRAY_BAD: Major alarm: fantray %d is missing or down FAN_TRAY_OK: Major alarm cleared: fan tray %d present FA
Enabling an SNMP Agent to Notify Syslog Server Failure You can configure a network device to send an SNMP trap if an audit processing failure occurs due to loss of connectivity with the syslog server. If a connectivity failure occurs on a syslog server that is configured for reliable transmission, an SNMP trap is sent and a message is displayed on the console.
Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP To do the following, use SNMP from a remote client. • copy the running-config file to the startup-config file • copy configuration files from the Dell Networking system to a server • copy configuration files from a server to the Dell Networking system You can perform all of these tasks using IPv4 or IPv6 addresses. The examples in this section use IPv4 addresses; however, you can substitute IPv6 addresses for the IPv4 addresses in all of the examples.
MIB Object OID Object Values Description copyDestFileLocation .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.6 1 = flash Specifies the location of destination file. 2 = slot0 3 = tftp • 4 = ftp If copyDestFileLocation is FTP or SCP, you must specify copyServerAddress, copyUserName, and copyUserPassword. 5 = scp copyDestFileName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.7 Path (if the file is not in the default directory) and filename. Specifies the name of destination file. copyServerAddress .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.
NOTE: You can use the entire OID rather than the object name. Use the form: OID.index i object-value. To view more information, use the following options in the snmpset command. • -c: View the community, either public or private. • -m: View the MIB files for the SNMP command. • -r: Number of retries using the option • -t: View the timeout. • -v: View the SNMP version (either 1, 2, 2d, or 3). The following examples show the snmpset command to copy a configuration.
FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.7 = INTEGER: runningConfig(3) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileType.7 = INTEGER: startupConfig(2) The following example shows how to copy configuration files from a UNIX machine using OID. >snmpset -c public -v 2c 10.11.131.162 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.2.8 i 3 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.5.8 i 2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.2.8 = INTEGER: 3 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.5.
Copy a Binary File to the Startup-Configuration To copy a binary file from the server to the startup-configuration on the Dell Networking system via FTP, use the following command. • Copy a binary file from the server to the startup-configuration on the Dell Networking system via FTP. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 1 copySrcFileLocation.index i 4 copySrcFileName.index s filepath/ filename copyDestFileType.index i 3 copyServerAddress.
MIB Object OID Values Description copy. The state is set to active when the copy is completed. Obtaining a Value for MIB Objects To obtain a value for any of the MIB objects, use the following command. • Get a copy-config MIB object value. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address [OID.index | mibobject.index] index: the index value used in the snmpset command used to complete the copy operation. NOTE: You can use the entire OID rather than the object name.
Viewing the Available Flash Memory Size • To view the available flash memory using SNMP, use the following command. snmpget -v2c -c public 192.168.60.120 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.9.1.6.1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.9.1.5.1 = Gauge32: 24 The output above displays that 24% of the flash memory is used. MIB Support to Display the Software Core Files Generated by the System Dell Networking provides MIB objects to display the software core files generated by the system.
enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.2.1.3 = "/CORE_DUMP_DIR/FTP_STK_MEMBER/ f10cp_vrrp_140522124357_Stk1.acore.gz" enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.2.2.1 = "/CORE_DUMP_DIR/FTP_STK_MEMBER/f10cp_sysd_140617134445_Stk0.acore.gz" enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.3.1.1 = "Fri Mar 14 11:51:46 2014" enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.3.1.2 = "Fri Nov 8 08:11:16 2013" enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.3.1.3 = "Fri May 23 05:05:16 2014" enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.3.2.1 = "Tue Jun 17 14:19:26 2014" enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.4 = INTEGER: 76200 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.1 = INTEGER: 40932 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.2 = INTEGER: 3922316 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.3 = INTEGER: 138868 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.4 = INTEGER: 4109908 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.1 = STRING: "/tmp" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.2 = STRING: "/usr/pkg" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.3 = STRING: "/f10/ConfD/db" .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.6.
MIB Support to Display Egress Queue Statistics Dell Networking OS provides MIB objects to display the information of the ECMP group count information. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 97. MIB Objects to display ECMP Group Count MIB Object OID Description dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpMax 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.6 Total CAM for ECMP group. dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpUsed 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.7 Used CAM for ECMP group. dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpAvl 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = "" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.10.1.1.1.32.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = "" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = "" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.20.1.1.1.32.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = STRING: "Po 20" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.1.32.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.
MIB Object OID Description entAliasMappingIdentifier 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2 Identifies a particular conceptual row associated with the indicated entPhysicalIndex and entLogicalIndex pair. Viewing the entAliasMappingTable MIB • To view the entAliasMappingTable generated by the system, use the following command. snmpwalk -v 2c -c public -On 10.16.150.97 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1 .1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2.5.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.2097157 .1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2.9.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.
MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggAggregateOrIndividual 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4 Contains a read–only boolean value (True or False) indicating whether the Aggregator represents an Aggregate or an Individual link. dot3adAggActorAdminKey 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.5 Contains a 16–bit read–write value which is the current administrative key. dot3adAggActorOperKey 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.6 Contains a 16–bit read–write value which is the operational key. dot3adAggPartnerSystemID 1.2.
Manage VLANs using SNMP The qBridgeMIB managed objects in Q-BRIDGE-MIB, defined in RFC 2674, allows you to use SNMP to manage VLANs. Creating a VLAN To create a VLAN, use the dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus object. The snmpset operation shown in the following example creates VLAN 10 by specifying a value of 4 for instance 10 of the dot1qVlanStaticRowStatus object. Example of Creating a VLAN using SNMP > snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 123.45.6.78 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.5.10 i 4 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.5.
The following example shows viewing VLAN ports using SNMP with no ports assigned. > snmpget -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.1107787786 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.
Example of Adding an Untagged Port to a VLAN using SNMP In the following example, Port 0/2 is added as an untagged member of VLAN 10. >snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.1107787786 x "40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00" .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.
Enabling and Disabling a Port using SNMP To enable and disable a port using SNMP, use the following commands. 1 Create an SNMP community on the Dell system. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community 2 From the Dell Networking system, identify the interface index of the port for which you want to change the admin status. EXEC Privilege mode show interface Or, from the management system, use the snmpwwalk command to identify the interface index.
The value of dot1dTpFdbPort is the port number of the port off which the system learns the MAC address. In this case, of TenGigabitEthernet 1/21, the manager returns the integer 118.
NOTE: The interface index does not change if the interface reloads or fails over. If the unit is renumbered (for any reason) the interface index changes during a reload. To display the interface number, use the following command. • Display the interface index number.
Example of Viewing Status of Learned MAC Addresses If we learn MAC addresses for the LAG, status is shown for those as well. dot3aCurAggVlanId SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.1.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 dot3aCurAggMacAddr SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.2.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 dot3aCurAggIndex SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.3.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 dot3aCurAggStatus SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.4.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.
Example of SNMP Output for Transceiver Monitoring Dell $ snmpwalk -v1 -c public 10.16.150.210 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1 | grep 2106373 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.1.2106373 = STRING: "Stack-Unit-1 OptionalModule-3 Port-5" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.2.2106373 = STRING: "Fo 1/3/5" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.3.2106373 = STRING: "40GBASE-SR4" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.4.2106373 = STRING: "AVAGO" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.5.
51 Stacking Using the Dell Networking OS stacking feature, you can interconnect multiple switch units with stacking ports or front end user ports. The stack becomes manageable as a single switch through the stack management unit. The system accepts Unit ID numbers from 0 to 11 and it supports stacking up to six units.
• Switch failure • Inter-switch stacking link failure • Switch insertion • Switch removal If the master switch goes off line, the standby replaces it as the new master and the switch with the next highest priority or MAC address becomes standby. Stack Master Election The stack elects a master and standby unit at bootup time based on two criteria. • Unit priority — User-configurable. The range is from 1 to 14. A higher value (14) means a higher priority. The default is 0.
Virtual IP You can manage the stack using a single IP, known as a virtual IP, that is retained in the stack even after a failover. The virtual IP address is used to log in to the current master unit of the stack. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported as virtual IPs. Use the following command to configure a virtual IP: Dell(conf)#virtual-ip {ip-address | ipv6–address | dhcp} Failover Roles If the stack master fails (for example, is powered off), it is removed from the stack topology.
Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:d5:f9:6f -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version --------------------------------------------------0 Standby online S4820T 7.8.1.0 52 1 Management online S4820T 7.8.1.
Supported Stacking Topologies The device supports stacking in a ring or a daisy chain topology. Dell Networking recommends the ring topology when stacking the switches to provide redundant connectivity. Figure 120. Supported Stacking Topologies High Availability on Stacks Stacks have master and standby management units analogous to Dell Networking route processor modules (RPM).
Example of Accessing Non-Master Units on a Stack via the Console Port -----------------CONSOLE ACCESS ON A STANDBY---------------------------Dell(standby)#? cd Change current directory clear Reset functions copy Copy from one file to another delete Delete a file dir List files on a filesystem disable Turn off privileged commands enable Turn on privileged commands exit Exit from the EXEC format Format a filesystem fsck Filesystem check utility pwd Display current working directory rename Rename a file reset
Stack Group/Port Numbers By default, each unit in Standalone mode is numbered stack-unit 0. A maximum of eight 10G stack links or two 40G stack links can be made between two units in a stack. The front end ports are divided into 16 stack groups, each with 40G of bandwidth. Stack groups 0 through 11 correspond to 10G stack groups with four ports each. Stack groups 12 to 15 are one 40G port each. The front end ports accommodate SFP, SFP+ and QSFP+.
Enabling Front End Port Stacking To enable the front ports on a unit for stacking, use the following commands. NOTE: After a port has been allocated for stacking, you can only use it for stacking. If stack-group 0 is allocated for stacking, you can use ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 for stacking but not for Ethernet anymore. If only port 0 is used for stacking, ports 1, 2, and 3 are spare; they cannot be used for Ethernet. NOTE: You can stack a maximum of eight 10G stack ports. 1 Assign a stack group for each unit.
CONFIGURATION mode stack-unit stack—unit—number priority priority 5 Assign a stack group for each unit. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unit stack-unit—id stack-group stack-group—id Begin with the first port on the management unit. Next, configure both ports on each subsequent unit. Finally, return to the management unit and configure the last port. (refer to the following example.) 6 Connect the units using stacking cables. NOTE: The device does not require special stacking cables.
The following example shows how to configure two new switches for stacking using 10G ports. Dell-1(conf)#stack-unit 0 stack-group 0 Setting ports Te 1/1 Te 1/2 Te 1/3 as stack group will make their interface configs obsolete after a reload. [confirm yes/no]:yes Dell-2(conf)#stack-unit 0 stack-group 0 Setting ports Te 1/1 Te 1/2 Te 1/3 as stack group will make their interface configs obsolete after a reload.
4 Assign a stack group to each unit. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unitstack-unit-number stack-group stack-group-number 5 Connect the new unit to the stack using stacking cables. Example of Adding a Stack Unit with a Conflicting Stack Number (Before and After) The following example shows adding a stack unit with a conflicting stack number (before).
Adding a Configured Unit to an Existing Stack To add a configured unit to an existing stack, use the following commands. If a stack unit goes down and is removed from the stack, the logical provisioning configured for that stack-unit number is saved on the master and standby units. When a new unit is added to the stack, if a stack group configuration conflict occurs between the new unit and the provisioned stack unit, the configuration of the new unit takes precedence.
• Dell Networking OS selects a master stack manager from the two existing managers based on the priority of the stack. • Dell Networking OS resets all the units in the losing stack; they all become stack members. • If there is no unit numbering conflict, the stack members retain their previous unit numbers. Otherwise, the stack manager assigns new unit numbers, based on the order that they come online.
Creating a Virtual Stack Unit on a Stack Use virtual stack units to configure ports on the stack before adding a new unit. • Create a virtual stack unit. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unit stack-unit-number provision S4820TS4048–ON Displaying Information about a Stack To display information about the stack, use the following command. • Display for stack-identity, status, and hardware information on every unit in a stack.
0 1 up AC up -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed ------------------------------------------0 0 up up 6960 up 6960 0 1 up up 6720 up 6720 Speed in RPM -- Unit 1 -Unit Type Status Required Type : Member Unit : not present : S4810 - 52-port GE/TE/FG (SE) -- Unit 2 -Unit Type Status : Member Unit : not present -- Unit 3 -Unit Type Status Next Boot Required Type Current Type Master priority Hardware Rev Num Ports Up Time Dell Networking Jumbo Capable POE Capable Burned In MAC No Of
1/60 3/48 3/52 3/56 3/60 3/60 0/56 0/60 40 40 40 40 40 up up up up up up down down up up Influencing Management Unit Selection on a Stack Stack priority is the system variable that Dell Networking OS uses to determine which units in the stack are the master and standby management units. If multiple units tie for highest priority, the unit with the highest MAC address prevails.
Resetting a Unit on a Stack You may reset any stack unit except for the master management unit, as shown in the following message. % Error: Reset of master unit is not allowed. To rest a unit on a stack, use the following commands. • Reload a stack-unit. EXEC Privilege mode • reset stack-unit unit-number Reload a member unit, from the unit itself. EXEC Privilege mode • reset-self Reset a stack-unit when the unit is in a problem state.
-- Unit 1 -Unit Type Status Next Boot Required Type Current Type Master priority Hardware Rev Num Ports Up Time Dell Networking Jumbo Capable POE Capable Boot Flash Memory Size Temperature Voltage Serial Number Part Number Vendor Id Date Code Country Code Piece Part ID PPID Revision Service Tag Expr Svc Code Auto Reboot Burned In MAC No Of MACs : Management Unit : online : online : S4810 - 52-port GE/TE/FG (SE) : S4810 - 52-port GE/TE/FG (SE) : 0 : 3.
2/39 stack-2# 3/47 10 up up Remove Units or Front End Ports from a Stack To remove units or front end ports from a stack, use the following instructions. • Removing a Unit from a Stack • Removing Front End Port Stacking Removing a Unit from a Stack The running-configuration and startup-configuration are synchronized on all stack units. A stack member that is disconnected from the stack maintains this configuration.
Removing Front End Port Stacking To remove the configuration on the front end ports used for stacking, use the following commands. 1 Remove the stack group configuration that is configured. CONFIGURATION mode no stack-unit id stack-group id 2 Save the stacking configuration on the ports. EXEC Privilege mode write memory 3 Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload After the units are reloaded, the system reboots. The units come up as standalone units after the reboot completes.
Recover from a Card Problem State on a Stack If a unit added to a stack has a different Dell Networking OS version, the unit does not come online and Dell Networking OS cites a card problem error. To recover, disconnect the new unit from the stack, change the Dell Networking OS version to match the stack, and then reconnect it to the stack.
Example of Recovering from a Card Mismatch State on a Stack (S50N and S25N) --------------------STANDALONE UNIT BEFORE--------------------Standalone#show system brief Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:d5:ef:81 -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports ---------------------------------------------------------0 Management online S50V S50V 7.8.1.
52 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The minimum number of packets per second (PPS) that storm control can limit on the device is two.
• Configure storm control. • INTERFACE mode Configure the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only). INTERFACE mode storm-control broadcast packets_per_second in • Configure the packets per second of multicast traffic allowed on C-Series or S-Series interface (ingress only) network only. INTERFACE mode storm-control multicast packets_per_second in • Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate.
53 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell Networking OS.
Configure Spanning Tree Configuring spanning tree is a two-step process.
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 123. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1 If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2 Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3 Enable the interface.
Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default.
no disable Examples of Verifying Spanning Tree Information To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group To add a Layer 2 interface to the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Enable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP.
The range is from 1 to 10. • the default is 2 seconds. Change the max-age parameter (the refresh interval for configuration information that is generated by recomputing the spanning tree topology). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally.
CAUTION: Enable PortFast only on links connecting to an end station. PortFast can cause loops if it is enabled on an interface connected to a network. To enable PortFast on an interface, use the following command. • Enable PortFast on an interface.
• Disable spanning tree on the interface (the no spanning-tree command in INTERFACE mode). • Disabling global spanning tree (the no spanning-tree in CONFIGURATION mode). Figure 125. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell Networking OS Behavior: BPDU guard and BPDU filtering both block BPDUs, but are two separate features. BPDU guard: • • is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message.
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ---------------Te 1/6 Root 128.263 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No Te 1/7 ErrDis 128.264 128 20000 EDS 20000 P2P No Dell(conf-if-te-1/7)#do show ip interface brief tengigabitEthernet 1/7 Interface IP-Address OK Method Status Protocol TenGigabitEthernet 1/7 unassigned YES Manual up up Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge.
In STP topology 3 (shown in the lower middle), if you have enabled the root guard feature on the STP port on Switch C that connects to device D, and device D sends a superior BPDU that would trigger the election of device D as the new root bridge, the BPDU is ignored and the port on Switch C transitions from a forwarding to a root-inconsistent state (shown by the green X icon). As a result, Switch A becomes the root bridge. Figure 126.
• Enable root guard on a port or port-channel interface. INTERFACE mode or INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode spanning-tree {0 | mstp | rstp | pvst} rootguard • • • • 0: enables root guard on an STP-enabled port assigned to instance 0. mstp: enables root guard on an MSTP-enabled port. rstp: enables root guard on an RSTP-enabled port. pvst: enables root guard on a PVST-enabled port.
lower left), Switch C does not receive BPDUs from Switch B. When the max-age timer expires, the STP port on Switch C becomes unblocked and transitions to Forwarding state. A loop is created as both Switch A and Switch C transmit traffic to Switch B. As shown in the following illustration (STP topology 2, upper right), a loop can also be created if the forwarding port on Switch B becomes busy and does not forward BPDUs within the configured forward-delay time.
Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
Example of Viewing STP Guard Configuration Dell#show spanning-tree 0 guard Interface Name Instance Sts Guard type --------- -------- --------- ---------Te 1/1 0 INCON(Root) Rootguard Te 1/2 0 LIS Loopguard Te 1/3 0 EDS (Shut) Bpduguard Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 903
54 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 128.
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard You are guided through a series of queries to configure SupportAssist. The generated commands are added to the running configuration, including the DNS resolve commands, if configured. This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Enable the SupportAssist service.
making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist. If you are downloading SupportAssist on behalf of a company or other legal entity, you are further certifying to Dell that you have appropriate authority to provide this consent on behalf of that entity.
support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now Dell#support-assist activity full-transfer start now Dell#support-assist activity core-transfer start now Configuring SupportAssist Activity SupportAssist Activity mode allows you to configure and view the action-manifest file for a specific activity. To configure SupportAssist activity, use the following commands. 1 Move to the SupportAssist Activity mode for an activity. Allows you to configure customized details for a specific activity.
action-manifest remove Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_event_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 6 Enable a specific SupportAssist activity. By default, the full transfer includes the core files. When you disable the core transfer activity, the full transfer excludes the core files.
Configuring SupportAssist Person SupportAssist Person mode allows you to configure name, email addresses, phone, method and time zone for contacting the person. SupportAssist Person configurations are optional for the SupportAssist service. To configure SupportAssist person, use the following commands. 1 Configure the contact name for an individual.
SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] proxy-ip-address {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}port port-number [ username userid password [encryption-type] password ] Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#proxy-ip-address 10.0.0.1 port 1024 username test password 0 test1 Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 3 Enable communication with the SupportAssist server.
activity event-transfer enable action-manifest install default ! activity core-transfer enable ! contact-company name Dell street-address F lane , Sector 30 address city Brussels state HeadState country Belgium postalcode S328J3 ! contact-person first Fred last Nash email-address primary des@sed.com alternate sed@dol.com phone primary 123422 alternate 8395729 preferred-method email time-zone zone +05:30 start-time 12:23 end-time 15:23 ! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.
55 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Following conventions established by the telephone industry [BEL86], the accuracy of each server is defined by a number called the stratum, with the topmost level (primary servers) assigned as one and each level downwards (secondary servers) in the hierarchy assigned as one greater than the preceding level. Dell Networking OS synchronizes with a time-serving host to get the correct time. You can set Dell Networking OS to poll specific NTP time-serving hosts for the current time.
Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring NTP Broadcasts • Disabling NTP on an Interface • Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default. To enable NTP, specify an NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes. To specify multiple servers, enter the command multiple times. You may specify an unlimited number of servers at the expense of CPU resources. • Specify the NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes.
Disabling NTP on an Interface By default, NTP is enabled on all active interfaces. If you disable NTP on an interface, Dell Networking OS drops any NTP packets sent to that interface. To disable NTP on an interface, use the following command. • Disable NTP on the interface. INTERFACE mode ntp disable To view whether NTP is configured on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If ntp disable is not listed in the show config command output, NTP is enabled.
CONFIGURATION mode ntp authenticate 2 Set an authentication key. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authentication-key number md5 key Configure the following parameters: 3 • number: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. This number must be the same as the number in the ntp trusted-key command. • key: enter a text string. This text string is encrypted. Define a trusted key. CONFIGURATION mode ntp trusted-key number Configure a number from 1 to 4294967295.
ref org rec xmt inp CD7E14FD.43F7CED9 CD7F5368.D0535000 CD7F5368.D0000000 CD7F5368.D0000000 CD7F5368.D1974000 (16:29:49.265 UTC Wed Apr 1 2009) (15:8:24.813 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) (15:8:24.812 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) (15:8:24.812 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) (15:8:24.
Configuring a Custom-defined Period for NTP time Synchronization You can configure the system to send an audit log message to a syslog server if the time difference from the NTP server is greater than a threshold value (offset-threshold). However, time synchronization still occurs. To configure the offset-threshold, follow this procedure. • Specify the threshold time interval before which the system generates an NTP audit log message if the system time deviates from the NTP server.
Setting the Timezone Universal time coordinated (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. To set the clock timezone, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone.
• end-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. • end-year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. • end-time: enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. • offset: (OPTIONAL) enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
Examples of the clock summer-time recurring Command The following example shows the clock summer-time recurring command.
56 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
no ip address ipv6 address 2::1/64 tunnel destination 90.1.1.1 tunnel source 60.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 3 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.
The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 20.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 20:1::1/64 no shutdown Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#show config ! interface Tunnel 1 ip address 1.1.1.1/24 ipv6 address 1abd::1/64 tunnel source anylocal tunnel allow-remote 40.1.1.
57 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. Feature Description A switch provides upstream connectivity for devices, such as servers. If a switch loses its upstream connectivity, downstream devices also lose their connectivity.
Figure 130. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 131. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
• • • If one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, either a user-configurable set of downstream ports or all the downstream ports in the group are put in an Operationally Down state with an UFD Disabled error. The order in which downstream ports are disabled is from the lowest numbered port to the highest.
4 (Optional) Enable auto-recovery so that UFD-disabled downstream ports in the uplink-state group come up when a disabled upstream port in the group comes back up. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode downstream auto-recover The default is auto-recovery of UFD-disabled downstream ports is enabled. To disable auto-recovery, use the no downstream auto-recover command. 5 (Optional) Enter a text description of the uplink-state group.
3/52 02:36:43: 3/56 02:36:43: 02:36:43: 02:36:43: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Downstream interface set to UFD error-disabled: Fo %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Fo 3/48 %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Fo 3/52 %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Fo 3/56 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_DN: Changed interface Admin state to down: Te 1/7 02:37:29: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: T
• group-id: The values are from 1 to 16. Examples of Viewing UFD Information (S50) The following example shows viewing the uplink state group status.
0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 00:01:23 The following example shows viewing the UFD configuration.
Dell# 00:13:06: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console Dell# show running-config uplink-state-group ! uplink-state-group 3 description Testing UFD feature downstream disable links 2 downstream TenGigabitEthernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 upstream TenGigabitEthernet 1/3-4 Dell# show uplink-state-group 3 Uplink State Group: 3 Status: Enabled, Up Dell# show uplink-state-group detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 3 Status: Enabled, Up U
58 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes. Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center. You can reach Technical Support: • On the web: http://www.dell.
59 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
Default VLAN When you configure interfaces for Layer 2 mode, they are automatically placed in the Default VLAN as untagged interfaces. Only untagged interfaces can belong to the Default VLAN. The following example displays the outcome of placing an interface in Layer 2 mode. To configure an interface for Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command.
VLANs and Port Tagging To add an interface to a VLAN, the interface must be in Layer 2 mode. After you place an interface in Layer 2 mode, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN. Dell Networking OS supports IEEE 802.1Q tagging at the interface level to filter traffic. When you enable tagging, a tag header is added to the frame after the destination and source MAC addresses. That information is preserved as the frame moves through the network.
• Configure a port-based VLAN (if the VLAN-ID is different from the Default VLAN ID) and enter INTERFACE VLAN mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id To activate the VLAN, after you create a VLAN, assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to the VLAN. Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/2 Dell#config Dell(conf)#interface vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#tagged po 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show conf ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address tagged Port-channel 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T 4 Active T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/2 Po1(So 0/0-1) When you r
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 Status Active Active 3 Active Q U T T T T Ports Te 1/2 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/3 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1 4 Inactive Dell#conf Dell(conf)#interface vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#untagged tengigabitethernet 1/2 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show config ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address untagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 3 4 Status Q Inactive Active T T Active T T Active U Ports Po1(So 0/0-1)
Native VLAN support breaks this barrier so that you can connect a port to both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware stations. Such ports are referred to as hybrid ports. Physical and port-channel interfaces may be hybrid ports. Native VLAN is useful in deployments where a Layer 2 port can receive both tagged and untagged traffic on the same physical port. The classic example is connecting a voice-over-IP (VOIP) phone and a PC to the same port of the switch.
60 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two Dell switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices. Overview In a traditional switched topology as shown below, spanning tree protocols (STPs) are used to block one or more links to prevent loops in the network.
Figure 134. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol. After VLT is established, you may use rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to prevent loops from forming with new links that are incorrectly connected and outside the VLT domain.
Figure 135. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: • Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. • Eliminates STP-blocked ports. • Provides a loop-free topology. • Uses all available uplink bandwidth. • Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. • Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). • Provides link-level resiliency. • Assures high availability. • Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces.
Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains In a VLT domain, the MAC address of any host connected to the VLT peers is synchronized between the VLT nodes. In the following example, VLAN 10 is spanned across three VLT domains. Figure 136. Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains If Host 1 from a VLT domain sends a frame to Host 2 in another VLT domain, the frame can use any link shown to reach Host 2.
30 30 30 30 30 30 a0:00:a1:00:00:07 a0:00:a1:00:00:08 a0:00:a1:00:00:09 a0:00:a1:00:00:0a a0:00:a1:00:00:0b a0:00:a1:00:00:0c Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active Po 11 Active VLT-10-PEER-2#show vlt statistics mac VLT MAC Statistics -------------------L2 Info Pkts sent:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Sent:7 L2 Info Pkts Rcvd:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Rcvd:9 L2 Reg Request sent:0 L2 Reg Request rcvd:0 L2 Reg Response sent:0 L2
Figure 137. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer. For better resiliency in the aggregation, Dell Networking recommends running the internal gateway protocol (IGP) on the VLTi VLAN to synchronize the L3 routing table across the two nodes on a VLT system. Enhanced VLT Enhanced VLT (eVLT)) refers to the ability to connect two VLT domains.
Figure 138. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT. If you enable both at the same time, unexpected behavior occurs. • VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. • If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT. Refer to Configure Rapid Spanning Tree.
• If the DHCP server is located on the ToR and the VLTi (ICL) is down due to a failed link when a VLT node is rebooted in BMP mode, it is not able to reach the DHCP server, resulting in BMP failure. • If the source is connected to an orphan (non-spanned, non-VLT) port in a VLT peer, the receiver is connected to a VLT (spanned) portchannel, and the VLT port-channel link between the VLT peer connected to the source and ToR is down, traffic is duplicated due to route inconsistency between peers.
• • Separately configure each VLT peer switch with the same VLT domain ID and the VLT version. If the system detects mismatches between VLT peer switches in the VLT domain ID or VLT version, the VLT Interconnect (VLTi) does not activate. To find the reason for the VLTi being down, use the show vlt statistics command to verify that there are mismatch errors, then use the show vlt brief command on each VLT peer to view the VLT version on the peer switch.
• • To connect servers and access switches with VLT peer switches, you use a VLT port channel, as shown in Overview. Up to 48 portchannels are supported; up to 16 member links are supported in each port channel between the VLT domain and an access device. • The discovery protocol running between VLT peers automatically generates the ID number of the port channel that connects an access device and a VLT switch.
• • • VRRP elects the router with the highest priority as the master in the VRRP group. To ensure VRRP operation in a VLT domain, configure VRRP group priority on each VLT peer so that a peer is either the master or backup for all VRRP groups configured on its interfaces. For more information, see Setting VRRP Group (Virtual Router) Priority. • To verify that a VLT peer is consistently configured for either the master or backup role in all VRRP groups, use the show vrrp command on each peer.
• Configure any ports at the edge of the spanning tree’s operating domain as edge ports, which are directly connected to end stations or server racks. Disable RSTP on ports connected directly to Layer 3-only routers not running STP or configure them as edge ports. • Ensure that the primary VLT node is the root bridge and the secondary VLT peer node has the second-best bridge ID in the network.
VLT Port Delayed Restoration When a VLT node boots up, if the VLT ports have been previously saved in the start-up configuration, they are not immediately enabled. To ensure MAC and ARP entries from the VLT per node are downloaded to the newly enabled VLT node, the system allows time for the VLT ports on the new node to be enabled and begin receiving traffic. The delay-restore feature waits for all saved configurations to be applied, then starts a configurable timer.
Figure 139. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers. To ensure the PIM protocol states or multicast routing information base (MRIB) on the VLT peers are synced, if the incoming interface (IIF) and outgoing interface (OIF) are Spanned, the multicast route table is synced between the VLT peers. To verify the PIM neighbors on the VLT VLAN and on the multicast port, use the show ip pim neighbor, show ip igmp snooping mrouter, and show running config commands.
Figure 140. Packets without peer routing enabled If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 141. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing • • Avoids sub-optimal routing • Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
• You can reduce the number of VLTi port channel members based on your specific design. With peer routing, you need not configure VRRP for the participating VLANs. As both VLT nodes act as a gateway for its peer, irrespective of the gateway IP address, the traffic flows upstream without any latency. There is no limitation for the number of VLANS. VLT Unicast Routing VLT unicast routing is a type of VLT peer routing that locally routes unicast packets destined for the L3 endpoint of the VLT peer.
The advantages of syncing the multicast routes between VLT peers are: • VLT resiliency — After a VLT link or peer failure, if the traffic hashes to the VLT peer, the traffic continues to be routed using multicast until the PIM protocol detects the failure and adjusts the multicast distribution tree. • Optimal routing — The VLT peer that receives the incoming traffic can directly route traffic to all downstream routers connected on VLT ports.
RSTP Configuration RSTP is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure RSTP in the network. RSTP is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase. You may also use RSTP for loop prevention in the network outside of the VLT port channel. For information about how to configure RSTP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Run RSTP on both VLT peer switches.
Configure RSTP on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 1) Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 4096 Configure RSTP on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 2) Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 0 Configuring VLT To configure VLT, use the following procedure.
3 Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: 4 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Ensure that the port channel is active.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode primary-priority value The priority values are from 1 to 65535. The default is 32768. If the primary peer fails, the secondary peer (with the higher priority) takes the primary role. If the primary peer (with the lower priority) later comes back online, it is assigned the secondary role (there is no preemption). 6 (Optional) Prevent a possible loop during the bootup of a VLT peer switch or a device that accesses the VLT domain.
CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs from 1 to 1000. 2 Enter an amount of time, in seconds, to delay the restoration of the VLT ports after the system is rebooted. CONFIGURATION mode delay-restore delay-restore-time The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1 Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain.
Connecting a VLT Domain to an Attached Access Device (Switch or Server) To connect a VLT domain to an attached access device, use the following commands. On a VLT peer switch: To connect to an attached device, configure the same port channel ID number on each peer switch in the VLT domain. 1 Configure the same port channel to be used to connect to an attached device and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2 Remove an IP address from the interface.
The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2 Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 3 Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-down-vlan vlan interface number Configuring Enhanced VLT (Optional) To configure enhanced VLT (eVLT) between two VLT domains on your network, use the following procedure.
The format is aaaa.bbbb.cccc. Also reconfigure the same MAC address on the VLT peer switch. Use this command to minimize the time required for the VLT system to synchronize the default MAC address of the VLT domain on both peer switches when one peer switch reboots. 7 When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch. To explicitly configure the default values on each peer switch, use the following command.
16 Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 17 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 1. 18 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the first VLT node in Domain 2. 19 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 2. To verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the show commands described in Verifying a VLT Configuration.
show running-config entity 12 Verify that VLT is running. EXEC mode show vlt brief or show vlt detail 13 Verify that the VLT LAG is running in both VLT peer units. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface Example of Configuring VLT In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is Dell-2, VLT peer 2 is Dell-4, and the ToR is S60-1.
2 Configure the VLT peer link port channel id in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3 In the Top of Rack unit, configure LACP in the physical ports (shown for VLT peer 1 only. Repeat steps for VLT peer 2. The bold vltpeer-lag port-channel 2 indicates that port-channel 2 is the port-channel id configured in VLT peer 2).
Role Role Priority ICL Link Status HeartBeat Status VLT Peer Status Version Local System MAC address Remote System MAC address Remote system version Delay-Restore timer Delay-Restore Abort Threshold Peer-Routing Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout Dell# : : : : : : : : : : Secondary 32768 Up Up Up 6(3) 00:01:e8:8a:e9:91 00:01:e8:8a:e9:76 6(3) 90 seconds : : : : 60 seconds Disabled 0 seconds 150 seconds Verify that the VLT LAG is up in VLT peer unit.
Configure both ends of the VLT interconnect trunk with identical PVST+ configurations. When you enable VLT, the show spanningtree pvst brief command output displays VLT information. Dell#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 1000 brief VLAN 1000 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 90b1.1cf4.9b79 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 90b1.1cf4.
Figure 142. Peer Routing Configuration Example Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge. Dell#1#show run | find protocol protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs.
The following is the configuration in interfaces: Dell#1#sh run int ma0/0 interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 description Used_for_VLT_Keepalive ip address 10.10.10.1/24 no shutdown (The management interfaces are part of a default VRF and are isolated from the switch’s data plane.) In Dell-1, te 0/0 and te 0/1 are used for VLTi.
Port channel 2 connects the access switch A1. Dell#1#sh run int po2 interface Port-channel 2 description port-channel_to_access_switch_A1 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency. When OSPF is converged, the routing tables in all devices are synchronized. Dell#1#sh run int vlan 20 interface Vlan 20 description OSPF PEERING VLAN ip address 192.168.20.
----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: Destination VRF: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.10.10.2 Up default 1 3 34998 4 5 Use the show vlt detail command to verify that VLT is functional and that the correct VLANs are allowed.
Verify if peer routing has populated the CAM table with the correct information using the show cam mac command.
The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10. Also note that configuration on the VLTi links does not contain the switchport command. Dell-2#sh run int po10 interface Port-channel 10 description VLTi Port-Channel no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/0-1 no shutdown Te 0/4 connects to the access switch A1.
The following output shows Dell-2 is configured with VLT domain 1. The peer-link port-channel command makes port channel 10 as the VLTi link. The peer-routing command enables peer routing between VLT peers in VLT domain 1. The IP address configured with the backupdestination command is the management IP address of the VLT peer (Dell-1). A priority value of 55000 makes Dell-2 as the secondary VLT peer. Dell-2#sh run | find vlt vlt domain 1 peer-link port-channel 10 back-up destination 10.10.10.
network 192.168.20.0/29 area 0 passive-interface default no passive-interface vlan 20 While the passive-interface default command prevents all interfaces from establishing an OSPF neighborship, the no passive-interface vlan 20 command allows the interface for VLAN 20, the OSPF peering VLAN, to establish OSPF adjacencies. The following output displays that Dell-1 forms neighborship with Dell-2 and R1. Dell-2#show ip ospf neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State 172.17.1.1 1 FULL/DR 172.15.1.
R1#show run int port-channel 1 interface Port-channel1 switchport ip address 192.168.20.3 255.255.255.248 R1#show run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.15.1.1 passive-interface default no passive-interface Port-channel1 network 2.2.2.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 3.3.3.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 4.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 (The above subnets correspond to loopback interfaces lo2, lo3 and lo4. These three loopback interfaces are advertised to the VLT pair, Dell#1 and Dell#2) network 172.15.1.0 0.0.0.
This default route is configured for testing purposes, as described in the next section. The access switch (A1) is used to generate ICMP test PINGs to a loopback interface on CR1. This default route points to Dell#2’s VLAN 800 SVI interface. It’s in place to ensure that routed test traffic has Dell#2’s MAC address as the destination address in the Ethernet frame’s header When A1 sends a packet to R1, the VLT peers act as the default gateway for each other.
Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 1/16 - 17 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# port-channel 100 mode active Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# no shutdown Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2.
Domain_1_Peer4#no shutdown Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#vlt domain 200 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.18.130.12 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# system-mac mac-address 00:0b:00:0b:00:0b Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-routing Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# unit-id 1 Configure eVLT on Peer 4.
Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches. • Display information on backup link operation. EXEC mode • show vlt backup-link Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch.
HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 3 34998 1026 1025 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.20 Up 1 3 34998 1030 1014 The following example shows the show vlt brief command.
VLT Role ---------VLT Role: System MAC address: System Role Priority: Local System MAC address: Local System Role Priority: Secondary 00:01:e8:8a:df:bc 32768 00:01:e8:8a:df:e6 32768 The following example shows the show running-config vlt command. Dell_VLTpeer1# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.18 Dell_VLTpeer2# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 We are the root Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ---------- -------- ---- ------- -------- - ------- ------------Po 1 128.2 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.2 Po 3 128.4 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.4 Po 4 128.
NUM Status Description Q Ports 10 Active U Po110(Fo 1/56) T Po100(Fo 1/48,52) Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 2) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#vlt domain 999 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.11.206.23 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#exit Configure the backup link.
Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information. NOTE: For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact, contact your Dell Networking representative. Table 105. Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above the 80% threshold and when it drops below 80%.
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take information, refer to the Release Notes for this release. VLT LAG ID is not configured on one VLT peer A syslog error message is generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. A syslog error message is generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. Verify the VLT LAG ID is configured correctly on both VLT peers. VLT LAG ID mismatch The VLT port channel is brought down.
Keep the following points in mind when you configure VLT nodes in a PVLAN: • Configure the VLTi link to be in trunk mode. Do not configure the VLTi link to be in access or promiscuous mode. • You can configure a VLT LAG or port channel to be in trunk, access, or promiscuous port modes when you include the VLT LAG in a PVLAN. The VLT LAG settings must be the same on both the peers. If you configure a VLT LAG as a trunk port, you can associate that LAG to be a member of a normal VLAN or a PVLAN.
PVLAN Operations When One VLT Peer is Down When a VLT port moves to the Admin or Operationally Down state on only one of the VLT nodes, the VLT Lag is still considered to be up. All the PVLAN MAC entries that correspond to the operationally down VLT LAG are maintained as synchronized entries in the device. These MAC entries are removed when the peer VLT LAG also becomes inactive or a change in PVLAN configuration occurs.
Table 106.
VLT LAG Mode Peer1 PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN Peer2 ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 - Primary VLAN Y - Primary VLAN X No No Promiscuous Access Primary Secondary No No Trunk Access Primary/Normal Secondary No No Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN You can configure the VLT peers or nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
7 Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 8 (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down.
• Specified with this command even before they have been created. • Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list. Proxy ARP Capability on VLT Peer Nodes The proxy ARP functionality is supported on VLT peer nodes. A proxy ARP-enabled device answers the ARP requests that are destined for the other router in a VLT domain. The local host forwards the traffic to the proxy ARP-enabled device, which in turn transmits the packets to the destination. By default, proxy ARP is enabled.
When a VLT node detects peer up, it does not perform proxy ARP for the peer IP addresses. IP address synchronization occurs again between the VLT peers. Proxy ARP is enabled only if you enable peer routing on both the VLT peers. If you disable peer routing by using the no peerroutingcommand in VLT DOMAIN node, a notification is sent to the VLT peer to disable the proxy ARP.
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode vlan-stack {access | trunk} 2 Configure VLAN as VLAN-stack compatible on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible 3 Add the VLT LAG as a member to the VLAN-stack on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode member port-channel port—channel ID 4 Verify the VLAN-stack configurations.
Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown Dell# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as Members to the VLAN Dell(conf)#interface vlan 50 Dell(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 Dell#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member
Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 10 ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport vlan-stack access vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown Dell# Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlan-stack trunk Dell(conf-if-po-20)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-
IPv6 Peer Routing in VLT Domains Overview VLT enables the physical links between two devices that are called VLT nodes or peers, and within a VLT domain, to be considered as a single logical link to external devices that are connected using LAG bundles to both the VLT peers. This capability enables redundancy without the implementation of Spanning tree protocol (STP), thereby providing a loop-free network with optimal bandwidth utilization.
Synchronization of IPv6 ND Entries in a Non-VLT Domain Layer 3 VLT provides a higher resiliency at the Layer 3 forwarding level. Routed VLT allows you to replace VRRP with routed VLT to route the traffic from Layer 2 access nodes. With ND synchronization, both the VLT nodes perform Layer 3 forwarding on behalf of each other. Synchronization of NDPM entries learned on non-VLT interfaces between the non-VLT nodes.
Figure 144. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
Figure 145. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Neighbor Solicitation from VLT Hosts Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL.
Consider a situation in which NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node1 on a non-VLT interface and NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node2 on a non-VLT interface. When VLT node1 receives NA on a VLT interface, it learns the Host MAC address on the received interface. This learned neighbor entry is synchronized to VLT node2 as it is learned on ICL.
Non-VLT host to Non-VLT host traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to the non-VLT host, it does neighbor entry lookup and routes traffic over ICL interface. If traffic reaches wrong VLT peer, it routes the traffic over ICL. Router Solicitation When VLT node receives router Solicitation on VLT interface/non-VLT interface it consumes the packets and will send RA back on the received interface. VLT node will drop the RS message if it is received over ICL interface.
61 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 146. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: • Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. • You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
• You cannot change the VLT LAG to a legacy LAG when it is part of proxy-gateway. • You cannot change the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) port channel interface to a legacy LAG when you enable a proxy gateway. • Dell Networking recommends the vlt-peer-mac transmit command only for square VLTs without diagonal links. • The virtual router redundancy (VRRP) protocol and IPv6 routing is not supported. • Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported.
• You must configure the interface proxy gateway LLDP to enable or disable a proxy-gateway LLDP TLV on specific interfaces. • The interface is typically a VLT port-channel that connects to a remote VLT domain. • The new proxy gateway TLV is carried on the physical links under the port channel only. • You must have at least one link connection to each unit of the VLT domain. Following are the prerequisites for Proxy Gateway LLDP configuration: • You must globally enable LLDP.
LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway in a Square VLT Topology Figure 147. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway • The preceding figure shows a sample square VLT Proxy gateway topology. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2. This causes sub-optimal routing.
• Any L3 packet, when it gets an L3 hit and is routed, it has a time to live (TTL) decrement as expected. • You can disable the VLT Proxy Gateway for a particular VLAN using an "Exclude-VLAN" configuration. The configuration has to be done in both the VLT domains [C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in VLT domain 2].
Figure 148. VLT Proxy Gateway Sample Topology VLT Domain Configuration Dell-1 and Dell-2 constitute VLT domain 120. Dell-3 and Dell-4 constitute VLT domain 110. These two VLT domains are connected using a VLT LAG P0 50. To know how to configure the interfaces in VLT domains, see the Configuring VLT section. Dell-1 VLT Configuration vlt domain 120 peer-link port-channel 120 back-up destination 10.1.1.
switchport no spanning-tree vlt-peer-lag port-channel 50 no shutdown Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used. VLAN 100 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between Dell-1 and Dell-2. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF Peering VLAN to Dell-2 ip address 10.10.100.1/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown VLAN 101 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between the two VLT domains.
The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2. Dell-2#sh ip ospf nei Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.100.1 Vl 100 0 Dell-3 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.1 1 FULL/ - 00:00:34 10.10.102.2 Vl 102 0 Dell-4 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
62 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time. VRF Overview VRF improves functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented without using multiple devices.
Figure 149. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
If the next-hop IP in a static route VRF statement is VRRP IP of another VRF, this static route does not get installed on the VRRP master. VRF supports some routing protocols only on the default VRF (default-vrf) instance. Table 1 displays the software features supported in VRF and whether they are supported on all VRF instances or only the default VRF. NOTE: To configure a router ID in a non-default VRF, configure at least one IP address in both the default as well as the nondefault VRF. Table 107.
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF OSPFv3 Yes Yes IS-IS Yes Yes BGP Yes Yes ACL Yes No Multicast No No NDP Yes Yes RAD Yes Yes DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance.
Assigning an Interface to a VRF You must enter the ip vrf forwarding command before you configure the IP address or any other setting on an interface. NOTE: You can configure an IP address or subnet on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP address or subnet configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If two interfaces are assigned to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address on them.
show ip vrf [vrf-name] Assigning an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance OSPF routes are supported on all VRF instances. See the Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2) chapter for complete OSPF configuration information. Assign an OSPF process to a VRF instance . Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPF process. The OSPF Process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process, and the Router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process.
Task Command Syntax Command Mode 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 43, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Configuring Management VRF You can assign a management interface to a management VRF. 1 Create a management VRF. CONFIGURATION ip vrf management 2 Assign a management port to a management VRF.
management route ip-address mask managementethernet ormanagement route ipv6-address prefixlength managementethernet You can also have the management route to point to a front-end port in case of the management VRF. For example: management route 2::/64 tengigabitethernet 1/1. • Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery. CONFIGURATION ipv6 neighbor vrf management 1::1 tengigabitethernet 1/1 xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Sample VRF Configuration The following configuration illustrates a typical VRF set-up.
Figure 151. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 128 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.
ip address 2.0.0.2/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.2/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.
Dell#show ip route vrf orange Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set C C O Destination ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway ----------------C 1.0.0.0/24 Direct, Vl 128 O 10.0.0.0/24 via 1.0.0.1, Vl 128 C 11.0.0.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 ip vrf forwarding VRF2 ip address 140.0.0.1/24 ip route vrf VRF1 20.0.0.0/16 140.0.0.2 vrf VRF2 ip route vrf VRF2 40.0.0.0/16 120.0.0.2 vrf VRF1 Dynamic Route Leaking Route Leaking is a powerful feature that enables communication between isolated (virtual) routing domains by segregating and sharing a set of services such as VOIP, Video, and so on that are available on one routing domain with other virtual domains.
ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-Shared is created and the interface 1/4 is assigned to this VRF. 2 Configure the export target in the source VRF:. ip route-export 1:1 3 Configure VRF-red. ip vrf vrf-red interface-type slot/port ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 4 Configure the import target in VRF-red. ip route-import 1:1 5 Configure the export target in VRF-red.
ip vrf ip ip ! ip vrf ! ip vrf ip ip ip VRF-Blue route-export route-import 3:3 1:1 VRF-Green VRF-shared route-export route-import route-import 1:1 2:2 3:3 Show routing tables of all the VRFs (without any route-export and route-import tags being configured) Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O 11.1.1.1/32 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 C 111.1.1.0/24 Direct, Te 1/11 0/0 00:00:10 22:39:59 Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 110/0 00:00:11 C 122.2.2.
C 122.2.2.0/24 O 44.4.4.4/32 00:00:11 Direct, VRF-Blue:Te 1/22 0/0 via 144.4.4.4 110/0 C Direct, Te 1/4 144.4.4.0/24 0/0 22:39:61 00:32:36 Important Points to Remember • If the target VRF conatins the same prefix as either the sourced or Leaked route from some other VRF, then route Leaking for that particular prefix fails and the following error-log is thrown. SYSLOG (“Duplicate prefix found %s in the target VRF %d”, address, import_vrf_id) with The type/level is EVT_LOGWARNING.
ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 2 Define a route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol. Dell(config)route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol permit 10 3 Define the matching criteria for the exported routes. Dell(config-route-map)match source-protocol ospf Dell(config-route-map)match source-protocol bgp This action specifies that the route-map contains OSPF and BGP as the matching criteria for exporting routes from vrf-red.
O 44.4.4.4/32 via vrf-red:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 << only OSPF and BGP leaked from VRF-red Important Points to Remember • Only Active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if VRF-A has two routes from BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active. In this scenario, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP. Even though the Target VRF-B has specified filtering options to match BGP, the BGP route is not leaked as that route is not active in the Source VRF.
63 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
Figure 152. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. In conjunction with Virtual Link Trunking (VLT), you can configure optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP).
CAUTION: Increasing the advertisement interval increases the VRRP Master dead interval, resulting in an increased failover time for Master/Backup election. Take caution when increasing the advertisement interval, as the increased dead interval may cause packets to be dropped during that switch-over time. NOTE: In a VLT environment, VRRP configuration acts as active-active and if route is not present in any of the VRRP nodes, the packet to the destination is dropped on that VRRP node. Table 109.
The VRID range is from 1 to 255. • NOTE: The interface must already have a primary IP address defined and be enabled, as shown in the second example. Delete a VRRP group. INTERFACE mode no vrrp-group vrid Examples of Configuring and Verifying VRRP The following examples how to configure VRRP. Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration.
Example: Migrating an IPv4 VRRP Group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3 NOTE: Carefully following this procedure, otherwise you might introduce dual master switches issues. To migrate an IPv4 VRRP Group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3: 1 Set the backup switches to VRRP version to both. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-100)#version both Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-100)#version both 2 Set the master switch to VRRP protocol version 3.
The VRID range is from 1 to 255. 2 Configure virtual IP addresses for this VRID. INTERFACE -VRID mode virtual-address ip-address1 [...ip-address12] The range is up to 12 addresses. Examples of the Configuring and Verifying a Virtual IP Address The following example shows how to configure a virtual IP address. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.2 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.
Setting VRRP Group (Virtual Router) Priority Setting a virtual router priority to 255 ensures that router is the “owner” virtual router for the VRRP group. VRRP elects the MASTER router by choosing the router with the highest priority. The default priority for a virtual router is 100. The higher the number, the higher the priority. If the MASTER router fails, VRRP begins the election process to choose a new MASTER router based on the next-highest priority.
To configure simple authentication, use the following command. • Configure a simple text password. INTERFACE-VRID mode authentication-type simple [encryption-type] password Parameters: • encryption-type: 0 indicates unencrypted; 7 indicates encrypted. • password: plain text. Examples of the authentication-type Command The bold section shows the encryption type (encrypted) and the password.
no preempt priority 255 virtual-address virtual-address virtual-address virtual-address 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Changing the Advertisement Interval By default, the MASTER router transmits a VRRP advertisement to all members of the VRRP group every one second, indicating it is operational and is the MASTER router. If the VRRP group misses three consecutive advertisements, the election process begins and the BACKUP virtual router with the highest priority transitions to MASTER.
priority 255 virtual-address virtual-address virtual-address virtual-address 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group. Each VRRP group can track up to 12 interfaces and up to 20 additional objects, which may affect the priority of the VRRP group. If the tracked interface goes down, the VRRP group’s priority decreases by a default value of 10 (also known as cost).
• (Optional) Display the configuration and the UP or DOWN state of tracked interfaces and objects in VRRP groups, including the time since the last change in an object’s state. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode • show vrrp (Optional) Display the configuration of tracked objects in VRRP groups on a specified interface.
Tracking states for 2 resource Ids: 2 - Up IPv6 route, 2040::/64, priority-cost 20, 00:02:11 3 - Up IPv6 route, 2050::/64, priority-cost 30, 00:02:11 The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface.
VRRP for IPv6 Configuration This section shows VRRP IPv6 topology with CLI configurations. Consider an example VRRP for IPv6 configuration in which the IPv6 VRRP group consists of two routers. Figure 153. VRRP for IPv6 Topology NOTE: This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI.
R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#ipv6 address 1::1/64 R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 10 NOTE: You must configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface. The VRRPv3 group becomes active as soon as you configure the link local address. Afterwards, you can configure the group’s virtual IPv6 address. R2(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address fe80::10 NOTE: The virtual IPv6 address you configure should be the same as the IPv6 subnet to which the interface belongs.
Virtual IP address: 1::10 fe80::10 Dell#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 0/0 TenGigabitEthernet 0/0, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:fd76 VRF: 0 default State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 214, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 Dell#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 2/8 TenGigabi
VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 548, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP.
Figure 154. VRRP for IPv4 Topology Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 2/31 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.
R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 2/31, VRID: 99, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 200, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 817, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:63 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.3 Authentication: (none) R2# Router 3 R3(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.1.1.
Figure 155. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
R2(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address fe80::10 R2(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address 1::10 R2(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-10)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ipv6 address 1::1/64 vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:
VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Scenario The following example shows how to enable VRRP in a non-VLAN. The following example shows a typical use case in which you create three virtualized overlay networks by configuring three VRFs in two switches. The default gateway to reach the Internet in each VRF is a static route with the next hop being the virtual IP address configured in VRRP. In this scenario, a single VLAN is associated with each VRF.
S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177. S1(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-101)#priority 100 S1(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-101)#virtual-address 10.10.1.2 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#no shutdown ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 S1(conf-if-te-1/2)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-2 S1(conf-if-te-1/2)#ip address 10.10.1.
! S2(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 S2(conf-if-te-1/3)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S2(conf-if-te-1/3)#ip address 20.1.1.6/24 S2(conf-if-te-1/3)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S2(conf-if-te-1/3-vrid-105)#priority 100 S2(conf-if-te-1/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.
Dell#show vrrp vrf vrf1 vlan 400 -----------------Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 1 vrf1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 278, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Dell#show vrrp vrf vrf2 port-channel 1 -----------------Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.
S2(conf-if-vl-300)#no shutdown Dell#show vrrp vrf vrf1 vlan 400 -----------------Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 1 vrf1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 278, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Vlan 400, IPv4 VRID: 10, Version: 2, Net: 20.1.1.2 VRF: 1 vrf1 State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: 20.1.
64 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, Level 0 diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
EXEC Privilege mode show system brief 3 Start diagnostics on the unit. diag stack-unit stack-unit-number When the tests are complete, the system displays the following message and automatically reboots the unit. Dell#00:09:42 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-SU-0.txt Diags completed... Rebooting the system now!!! Mar 12 10:40:35: %S6000:0 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_DONE: Diags finished on stack unit 1 Dell#00:09:42 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-SU-0.
-- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0 up up 13466 up 13466 0 1 up up 13653 up 13466 Speed in RPM The following example shows the diag command (standalone unit).
Serial Number Part Number Product Revision Product Order Number : : : : SWDG129100003 2P7Y5 A 02P7Y52BE0005A00123SBC902 **************************** S4820T LEVEL 0 DIAGNOSTICS************************** diagS4810DumpPowerGoodStatus[653]: ERROR: Psu : 0 Output voltage is NOT in regulation range Test 1.000 - Psu Power Good Test .................................... FAIL Test 1.001 - Psu Power Good Test .................................... PASS Test 1 - Psu Power Good Test ....................................
Table 110. Line Card Restart Causes and Reasons Causes Displayed Reasons Remote power cycle of the chassis push button reset reload soft reset reboot after a crash soft reset Hardware Watchdog Timer The hardware watchdog command automatically reboots an Dell Networking OS switch/router with a single RPM that is unresponsive. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual power cycle.
• View the ingress and egress internal packet-drop counters, MAC counters drop, and FP packet drops for the stack unit on per port basis. EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack-unit {0-11} drops unit {0-1} port {1-64} • This view helps identifying the stack unit/port pipe/port that may experience internal drops. View the input and output statistics for a stack-port interface.
QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 Encoding = 0x05 Length(SFM) Km = 0x00 Length(OM3) 2m = 0x32 Length(OM2) 1m = 0x00 Length(OM1) 1m = 0x00 Length(Copper) 1m = 0x00 Vendor Rev = 01 Laser Wavelength = 850.
CHMGR-2-TEMP_SHUTDOWN_WARN: WARNING! temperature is [value]C; approaching shutdown threshold of [value]C To view the programmed alarm thresholds levels, including the shutdown value, use the show alarms threshold command.
OID String OID Name Description .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.8 chSysPortXfpTxPower OID displays the transmitting power of the connected optics. chSysPortXfpRecvTemp OID displays the temperature of the connected optics. Temperature .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.5.1.7 NOTE: These OIDs only generate if you enable the enable opticinfo-update-interval is enabled command. Hardware MIB Buffer Statistics .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.
CONFIGURATION mode buffer-profile global [1Q|4Q] If the default buffer profile dynamic is active, Dell Networking OS displays an error message instructing you to remove the default configuration using the no buffer-profile global command. Troubleshooting Packet Loss The show hardware stack-unit command is intended primarily to troubleshoot packet loss. To troubleshoot packet loss, use the following commands.
Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 drops unit 0 Port# :Ingress Drops :IngMac Drops :Total Mmu Drops :EgMac Drops :Egress Drops 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 Example of show hardware drops interface interface Dell#show hardware drops interface tengigabitethernet 2/1 Drops in Interface Te 2/1: --- Ingress Drops --Ingress Drops IBP CBP Full Drops PortSTPnotFwd Drops IPv4 L3 Discards Policy Discards Packets dropped by FP (L2+L3) Drops Port bitmap ze
Dataplane Statistics The show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics command provides insight into the packet types coming to the CPU. The show hardware stack-unit cpu party-bus statistics command displays input and output statistics on the party bus, which carries inter-process communication traffic between CPUs. The command output in the following example has been augmented, providing detailed RX/ TX packet statistics on a per-queue basis.
1649566 packets, 1935316203 bytes 0 errors Display Stack Port Statistics The show hardware stack-unit stack-port command displays input and output statistics for a stack-port interface.
RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - RUNT frame counter Fragment counter VLAN tagged packets 64 Byte Frame Counter 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/frame Counter Unicast Packet Cou
RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - VLAN tagged packets 64 Byte Frame Counter 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/frame Counter Unicast Packet Counter Multicast Packet Counter Broadcast Fr
RX - PFC Frame Priority 6 RX - PFC Frame Priority 7 RX - Debug Counter 0 RX - Debug Counter 1 RX - Debug Counter 2
Example of a Mini Core Text File VALID MAGIC -----------------PANIC STRING ----------------panic string is : ---------------STACK TRACE START--------------0035d60c : 00274f8c : 0024e2b0 : 0024dee8 : 0024d9c4 : 002522b0 : 0026a8d0 : 0026a00c : ----------------STACK TRACE END-----------------------------------FREE MEMORY--------------uvmexp.
65 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
Force10 PVST+ SFF-8431 SFP+ Direct Attach Cable (10GSFP+Cu) MTU 12,000 bytes RFC and I-D Compliance Dell Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 112.
General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols. Table 113. General IPv4 Protocols R F C # Full Name Z-Series S-Series 79 Internet Protocol 1 7.6.1 79 Internet Control 2 Message Protocol 7.6.1 82 An Ethernet Address 6 Resolution Protocol 7.6.1 10 Using ARP to 27 Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways 7.6.1 10 DOMAIN NAMES 3 IMPLEMENTATION 5 AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.
R F C # Full Name Z-Series S-Series 21 Dynamic Host 31 Configuration Protocol 7.6.1 23 Virtual Router 38 Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 7.6.1 3 Using 31-Bit Prefixes 02 on IPv4 Point-to1 Point Links 7.7.1 3 DHCP Relay Agent 0 Information Option 46 7.8.1 3 0 6 9 7.8.1 VLAN Aggregation for Efficient IP Address Allocation 31 Protection Against a 28 Variant of the Tiny Fragment Attack 7.6.
RF C# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 246 4 Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.1 267 5 IPv6 Jumbograms 7.8.1 2711 IPv6 Router Alert Option 8.3.12.0 358 IPv6 Global 7 Unicast Address Format 7.8.1 400 IPv6 Scoped 7 Address Architecture 8.3.12.0 429 Internet 1 Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Addressing Architecture 7.8.1 444 3 7.8.1 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the IPv6 Specification 486 Neighbor 1 Discovery for IPv6 8.3.12.
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for BGP protocols. Table 115. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) RFC# Full Name S-Series/Z-Series 1997 BGP ComAmtturnibituitees 7.8.1 2385 Protection of BGP Sessions via the TCP MD5 Signature Option 7.8.1 2439 BGP Route Flap Damping 7.8.1 2545 Use of BGP-4 Multiprotocol Extensions for IPv6 Inter-Domain Routing 2796 BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) 7.8.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 117.
Multicast The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 119. Multicast RFC# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting 7.8.1 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 7.8.1 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3 7.8.1 3569 An Overview of SourceSpecific Multicast (SSM) 7.8.
RFC# Full Name S4810 1850 OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 7.6.1 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2 7.6.1 2011 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2012 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Transmission Control Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2013 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the User Datagram Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2024 Definitions of Managed Objects for Data Link Switching using SMIv2 7.6.
RFC# Full Name 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic 7.6.1 Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 2787 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 7.6.1 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base: Ethernet Statistics Table, Ethernet History Control Table, Ethernet History Table, Alarm Table, Event Table, Log Table 7.6.1 2863 The Interfaces Group MIB 7.6.
RFC# Full Name S4810 isisISAdjIPAddrTable isisISAdjProtSuppTable draft-ietf-netmod-interfaces-cfg-03 Defines a YANG data model for the configuration of network interfaces. Used in the Programmatic Interface RESTAPI feature. 9.2(0.0) IEEE 802.1AB Management Information Base module for LLDP configuration, statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 7.7.1 IEEE 802.1AB The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802.
RFC# Full Name S4810 FORCE10-SYSTEM-COMPONENT-MIB Force10 System Component MIB (enables the user to view CAM usage information) 7.6.1 FORCE10-TC-MIB Force10 Textual Convention 7.6.1 FORCE10-TRAP-ALARM-MIB Force10 Trap Alarm MIB 7.6.1 MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.
66 X.509v3 Dell Networking OS supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • • • • • • • • • Introduction to X.509v3 certification X.509v3 support in Dell Networking OS Information about installing CA certificates Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Information about installing trusted certificates Transport layer security (TLS) Online Certificate Status Protocol (OSCP) Verifying certificates Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certification X.
1 An entity or organization that wants a digital certificate requests one through a CSR. 2 To request a digital certificate through a CSR, a key pair is generated and the CSR is signed using the secret private key. The CSR contains information identifying the applicant and the applicant's public key. This public key is used to verify the signature of the CSR and the Distinguished Name (DN). 3 This CSR is sent to a Certificate Authority (CA).
The Root CA generates a private key and a self-signed CA certificate. The Intermediate CA generates a private key and a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Using its private key, the root CA signs the intermediate CA’s CSR generating a CA certificate for the Intermediate CA. This intermediate CA can then sign certificates for hosts in the network and also for further intermediate CAs.
During the initial TLS protocol negotiation, both participating parties also check to see if the other’s certificate is revoked by the CA. To do this check, the devices query the CA’s designated OCSP responder on the network. The OCSP responder information is included in the presented certificate, the Intermediate CA inserts the info upon signing it, or it may be statically configured on the host. Information about installing CA certificates Dell Networking OS enables you to download and install X.
If you do not specify the cert-file option, the system prompts you to enter metadata information related to the CSR as follows: You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request. What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN. There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank. For some fields there will be a default value; if you enter '.', the field will be left blank.
NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS. This trusted certificate is also presented to the TLS server implementations that require client authentication such as Syslog.
TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA TLS compression is disabled by default. TLS session resumption is also supported to reduce processor and traffic overhead due to public key cryptographic operations and handshake traffic. However, the maximum time allowed for a TLS session to resume without repeating the TLS authentication or handshake process is configurable with a default of 1 hour.
NOTE: If you have an IPv6 address in the URL, then enclose this address in square brackets. For example, http:// [1100::203]:6514. Configuring OCSP behavior You can configure how the OCSP requests and responses are signed when the CA or the device contacts the OCSP responders. To configure this behavior, follow this step: In CONFIGURATION mode, enter the following command: crypto x509 ocsp {[nonce] [sign-request]} Both the none and sign-request parameters are optional.
Verifying Server certificates Verifying server certificates is mandatory in the TLS protocol. As a result, all TLS-enabled applications require certificate verification, including Syslog servers. The system checks the Server certificates against installed CA certificates. NOTE: As part of the certificate verification, the hostname or IP address of the server is verified against the hostname or IP address specified in the application.
